JP7231224B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game, and executes an effect based on the determination result.

In the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether or not a game ball is won in the starting hole and a special game is to be executed, the special symbol display device displays the determination result after the special symbol is variably displayed. The pattern is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, the effect symbols are variably displayed as the special symbols are variably displayed, and as the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the judgment result is displayed. The effect pattern is stopped and displayed.

JP 2015-96091 A

By the way, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in terms of improving the entertainment of the presentation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the entertainment of presentation.

The present invention employs the following configurations in order to solve the above problems.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information is stop-displayed, and when a predetermined command is received as the command in the variable display of the identification information, the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol, and during the variable effect In addition, it is possible to execute a preliminary performance that suggests in advance the possibility that a special game will be executed, and the preliminary performance includes a first preliminary performance and a second preliminary performance that is different from the first preliminary performance. Yes, in the stop display of the identification information, it is possible to execute the stop display by the production pattern, in the variable production, it is possible to execute the start operation production to operate the production pattern in a predetermined mode, and the start operation production After that, it is possible to execute a variable display effect that variably displays the effect symbol, and after the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop operation effect that operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the identification information When the predetermined command is not received when the variable display is performed, it is possible not to execute the start action effect and the first preliminary effect, but it is possible to execute the second preliminary effect. When a predetermined condition is satisfied , the variable effect can be terminated by executing the stop display with the effect symbol when the predetermined time elapses after the pre-stop action effect, and the background image is displayed. is capable of executing a background effect that operates at least a part of the above, the background effect can be executed during the execution of the pre-stop action effect and the stop display by the effect pattern, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is capable of executing the background effect without executing the stop display by the effect symbol when the predetermined time elapses after the pre-stop action effect, and during the execution of the variable effect, the following When a predetermined command is received, the start action effect can be executed according to the next predetermined command .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of presentation.

Front view of pachinko machine 1 A plan view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1 Perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 Disassembled perspective view of game board 5 Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1 Flowchart showing main processing in main control unit 100 Flowchart showing initial setting processing of the main control unit 100 Flowchart showing setting change processing of the main control unit 100 Flowchart showing RWM clear processing of main control unit 100 Flowchart showing setting confirmation processing of the main control unit 100 Flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in main control unit 100 Detailed flow chart of the starting opening detection switch process in step S200 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing special symbol processing in step S300 in FIG. Flowchart showing details of the special figure variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG. A detailed flow chart showing the stopping process in step S416 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing jackpot game processing in step S500 of FIG. A detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process in step S519 of FIG. A diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol determination table used for jackpot symbol determination in the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. Flowchart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control unit 100 A diagram showing display information of the information display in each game section A diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern table used when selecting a special symbol variation pattern in a normal game state A diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern table used when selecting a special symbol variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the effect control unit 130 Flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step E10 of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of start winning command processing in step E111 of FIG. A diagram showing an example of an icon change scenario table A diagram showing an example of an effect production scenario table at the start A diagram showing an example of a zone effect scenario table A diagram showing an example of a chance presentation scenario table Flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start command process in step E113 of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the image sound control unit 140 3 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in lamp control unit 150; A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when initializing various drive sources while changing settings A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when initializing various drive sources while preparing for RWM clear A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation Diagram showing operation comparison at various operation timings of various drive sources A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when initializing various drive sources after setting changes A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when initializing various drive sources after RWM is cleared. A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation Diagram for explaining the cycle variation of special symbols A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the effect mode A set in the normal game state. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the effect mode D set in the variable probability gaming state A diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of the effect from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol to the stop when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination in the normal game state. A diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of the effect from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol to the stop when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination in the normal game state. A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 43 and 44 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 43 and 44 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 43 and 44 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 43 and 44 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 43 and 44 A diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of an effect when a volume adjustment operation is performed during variable display and stop display of special symbols. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the first image display device 70 at each timing of FIG. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the first image display device 70 at each timing of FIG. A diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed. FIG. 53 is a continuation of the timing chart of FIG. 53, showing a timing chart in the case where loss is notified as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 53 and 54 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 53 and 54 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 53 and 54 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 53 and 54 A diagram showing an example of a timing chart when a jackpot is announced as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect A diagram showing an example of an effect when a big hit is announced as a result of the SPSP reach effect. A diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the look-ahead continuous effect is performed two fluctuations before the look-ahead target fluctuation FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 61, showing an example of a timing chart from one variation before the look-ahead target variation to the middle of the look-ahead target variation. A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 61 and 62 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 61 and 62 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 61 and 62 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing of FIGS. 61 and 62 A diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the effect control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100 during variable display of special symbols. A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing in FIG. 67 A diagram showing an example of an effect at each timing in FIG. 67 A diagram showing an effect example in which the leftmost first pending icon HA3 is erased when one extra first pending icon HA is displayed. A diagram showing an effect example in which the rightmost first pending icon HA1 is erased when one extra first pending icon HA is displayed. A diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the power supply is cut off during the variable display of the first special symbol A diagram showing an example of display at each timing in FIG. A diagram showing an example of display at each timing in FIG. A diagram showing an example of display at each timing in FIG.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a plan view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Above the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker and a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs are provided. Further, below the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95, which will be described later, based on the fulfillment of the giving conditions, and an upper A lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the tray 11 and flowed into an overflowing ball flow path, which will be described later, and a shooting operation device 13 that can be operated to shoot the game balls are provided. .

The audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), sound effects, and the like to produce sound effects (sounds such as music and voice). A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 is also provided with a notification LED 10a which is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality occurs such that game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper tray 11 is for storing game balls supplied to the shooting device 26. - 特許庁The game balls stored in the upper tray 11 are guided to the shooting device 26 and shot to the game area 5a with a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. - 特許庁

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (Fig. 1 or 2) function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. ) are provided.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a normal state and a normal state of the production button 17. A button driving device 17b equipped with a button driving motor for changing to a projecting state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner; A performance button light emitting LED 17c is provided for changing the performance button 17 between a light-off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner. A player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 using the performance button device 16 .

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the occurrence of a plate full error when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path. While the full state is detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. (not shown) and a firing volume composed of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 . When the touch sensor detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the shooting device 26 (see FIG. 5) is configured to shoot a game ball.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 (see FIG. 5) for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, and a game board. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3 so that the game board 5 can be accommodated from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the game machine 1 through this opening. .

The shooting device 26 includes a hitting member for shooting game balls and a shooting solenoid for driving the hitting member. The shooting device 26 shoots out the game ball toward the game area 5a by operating the shooting solenoid with strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 of the shooting operation device 13 .

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of the game ball into the inside. The left game area is divided into a left game area where the shot game balls flow down and a right game area where the game balls shot with a second projectile force stronger than the first projectile flow. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 , and the warp device 41 moves the interior of the decorative frame 40 below the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow downward.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win a prize (enter a ball) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, a game One general winning hole 43 in which a ball can always win a prize (enter a ball) is provided. When the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (granting conditions are satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. A payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting port 45 (a first special symbol starting winning area) in which a game ball can always win (enter a ball). When the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45, the right to perform a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored). . Also, when game balls enter the first start port 45, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are sent from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) as prize balls (given prize value) to the upper tray 11. paid out to Inside the first starting hole 45, a first starting hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the first starting hole 45 is provided.

A variable starter 46 is provided in the game area 5a diagonally below the first starter port 45 to the right. The variable starting unit 46 changes the state from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize (enter a ball) based on winning in a hit determination (auxiliary game determination) to be described later. It is configured to be changeable to a state.

Specifically, the variable starting part 46 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to serve as a flow path for game balls, and a second starting opening opening/closing member that can move in the front-rear direction. 48, a second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the second starting opening opening and closing member 48, and a game ball that wins (enters) the second starting opening 47 The second start opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) for detecting and the second start opening opening/closing member 48 are moved forward (winning regulation position), thereby converting the second start opening 47 to the closed state. , and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) for converting the second starting port 47 to the open state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning position). .

When the game ball wins the second starting port 47 that is in the open state during the auxiliary game described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (granting conditions are established), the special game A right for performing a jackpot determination as to whether or not (jackpot game) is executed is granted (special figure determination information described later is stored). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is dispensed to the upper tray 11 as an award of prize value).

In the right game area in the game area 5a, a normal figure gate 44 (normal figure starting area) through which the game ball can always pass is provided. Then, the prize ball is not granted, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) of whether or not to execute the winning game is granted (normal pattern determination information described later is stored).

Below the normal figure gate 44, based on the fact that it is determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination, it is possible to change from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) to an open state where winning is possible or easy. A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) is provided.

The first variable winning portion 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to serve as a flow path for game balls (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b is ), a first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a first big winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (entered) the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position) For changing the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning position) to change the first big winning opening 50 to the open state. It has a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5).

When the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward during a jackpot game to be described later and the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 The game ball flowing down or the game ball reaching the first big prize hole 50 can win the first big prize hole 50.例文帳に追加When the game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 50 is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is put out to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

Below the first variable winning section 49, based on the determination of a big hit in the jackpot determination, the closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) is changed to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win a prize. A changeable second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) is provided.

The second variable winning portion 55 (second variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing), thereby forming a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). ), a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a second large winning opening opening/closing member 56 that opens upward directly below the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 (winning area). Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved forward (winning regulation position). As a result, the second large winning opening 56 is changed to the closed state, and the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 is moved toward the rear (winning position) to change the second large winning opening 56 to the open state. A second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 56 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 flows down. The game ball that has been playing and the game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 can win the second big winning hole 56.例文帳に追加When the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 56 is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example 10) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is put out to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

In addition, the game ball shot to the left side game area wins either one of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided below the decorative frame 40, or flows into the out opening 39. . Therefore, the game ball fired to the left side game area is provided in the right side game area normal figure gate 44, general winning opening 43, first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50) and second variable winning part 55 (Second Grand Prize Opening 56) There is no winning (passing).

In addition, the game ball launched to the right game area passes through the normal figure gate 44 and the like via the upstream flow path 91a, and is provided in the right game area by one general winning opening 43, the variable starter 46 (second Starting port 47), first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning port 50), second variable winning portion 55 (second big winning port 56), or flow into out port 39 Become. Therefore, the game ball shot to the right game area does not enter the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39 An out-ball flow path is provided for receiving and gathering out-balls made up of inflowing game balls to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. FIG.

A main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a. The main information display device 59 includes a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, and a normal symbol display device 62. Also, the main information display device 59 includes a first special symbol reservation display device 63 , a second special symbol reservation display device 64 and a normal symbol reservation display device 65 . The main information display 59 also includes a round number display 66 , a right-handed display 67 , and a state confirmation display 68 .

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. There is, the second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the second starting port 47 The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol hit determination performed based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44. .

The jackpot determination is the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for jackpot pattern determination, random number for reach determination It is to determine whether or not to execute a big hit game based on the obtained special figure determination information.

Each of the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 is composed of a plurality of (specifically eight) LEDs. When a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped after a predetermined period of time. The result of the big hit determination is notified by the stop mode of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol display device 60, the lighting mode of the LED changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms), so that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the first special The stop display of the first special symbol is performed by lighting each LED of the symbol display 60 in a mode (big hit mode or losing mode) for informing the result of the big hit determination. Also, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and after a predetermined time has passed, it is stopped and displayed. The result of the big hit determination is notified by the stop mode of the second special symbol. Specifically, in the second special symbol display device 61, the lighting mode of the LED changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms), so that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The stop display of the second special symbol is performed by lighting each LED of the symbol display 61 in a mode (big hit mode or losing mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means a state in which execution of a jackpot game (special game) is determined in the jackpot determination. The "jackpot game" is a round game in which the big winning holes (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) are changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined number of times ( For example, 4 times, 10 times, etc.), and refers to a state in which the player can easily win prize balls, which is advantageous for the player. The period of the "jackpot game" means the time from when the first special symbol or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner and the opening starts to when the round game ends and the ending ends. You may

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50, second big winning mouth 56) in each round game are predetermined, However, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the big winning hole (enter the ball), one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Auxiliary game determination refers to normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 ), and determines whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired general pattern determination information. It should be noted that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display device 62 performs normal symbol fluctuation display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the normal symbol variation display. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) for notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination. In the normal symbol display 62, the lighting mode of the LED changes (moving lighting) at the same cycle (32 ms) as the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61.

It should be noted that the term "hit" in the present embodiment refers to a state in which it is determined that an auxiliary game (hitting game) is to be executed in the auxiliary game determination. "Auxiliary game" refers to a state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) win a prize (entering a ball), the auxiliary game (hitting game) ends. That is, the "auxiliary game" is in a state in which the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be established. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) having different degrees of advantage to the player may be provided.

The first special symbol reservation display device 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45. It is for displaying a certain first pending number (U1), and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first pending. It should be noted that although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. It should be noted that although up to four second reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four, and the second reservations may not be stored.

The normal pattern reservation display 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of normal pattern determination information (normal pattern reservation) stored when the game ball wins (passes) in the normal pattern gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of normal pattern reservations is stored up to 4, it may be less than or greater than 4, and the normal pattern reservations may not be stored.

Incidentally, the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be composed of 7-segment LEDs. For example, when it is judged as a big hit in the big hit judgment, numbers such as "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and when it is judged as a loss, "-" is stopped and displayed as a variable display. It is preferable to repeat turning off and "-" inside.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of six LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big win state (special game) occurs, in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds at the start of the big win game. Lighting of the LED is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED and is for displaying a right-handed display prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side game area (so-called right-handed hitting). , During the jackpot state (special game), during the later-described variable probability game state, and during the time-saving game state, the LED lights up.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. Lighting of the LED is started, and the LED is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Since the state confirmation display 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the game machine in this way, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. . The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. can be displayed if possible. For example, the state confirmation display 68 may be illuminated in the setting change mode, and the state confirmation display 68 may be blinked in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation display device 64, the round number display device 66, right-handed indicators 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

Also, a sub information display 80 is provided inside the game area 5a. The sub information display device 80 includes a sub first fluctuation display device 81, a sub second fluctuation display device 82, a sub first reservation display device 83, a sub second reservation display device 84, and a sub normal figure fluctuation display device 85. , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right hitting display 87. Although the sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above, a An indicator may be provided.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the second sub-variation display 82 is for variably displaying the second special symbol. It is for displaying (announcing) whether or not it is inside, and each is configured by one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (eg, 0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop display (lights off or lit).

It should be noted that the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 may be used to notify the result of the special symbol jackpot determination. In this case, it is preferable that the LED is turned on in the case of a big win, and the LED is turned off in the case of a loss.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the reservation number (first reservation number) of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the second sub-reservation display 84 is the second special symbol jackpot determination. is for displaying the number of reservations (the second number of reservations), each of which is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of holds is "3", the left LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off), and the right LED lights up, and the number of holds is " 4”, the left and right LEDs flash at a predetermined cycle (0.25 seconds ON→0.25 seconds OFF).

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation memories (normal pattern reservation number), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side lights up. When the pending number is "4", the left and right LEDs blink at a predetermined cycle.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game), the variable probability game state, or the time saving game state, and the LED goes out in other game states.

A first image display device 70 is provided in the inner part of the performance space 40 a defined inside the decorative frame 40 . A second image display device 71 having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 is provided in front of the first image display device 70 in the lower part of the production space 40a. The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 may be liquid crystal displays or organic EL displays. In addition, a movable effect device 73 for executing action effects is provided in the upper part of the effect space 40a.

In the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various effect displays are performed according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demonstration effect performed while the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the variable effect by the effect symbol 701 performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol (start operation effect, variable display, which will be described later) effect, motion effect before stopping, etc.), variable display (renewal change) of small symbols 702 performed during execution of variable display of special symbols, and jackpot effect performed during execution of a jackpot game.

Further, the second image display device 71 can perform a movement effect by moving by a movable device (not shown) configured by a solenoid, a motor, or the like while the first image display device 70 is executing a variable effect. It's becoming

Specifically, the second image display device 71 has a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a production position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70 . position) and move (up, down) in the vertical direction to perform a movement effect. The direction of movement of the second image display device 71 may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured such that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 .

On the display section (display area) of the first image display device 70, three production patterns 701 (from left to right, sometimes referred to as a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern) and a small pattern 702 are displayed. The effect pattern 701 and the small pattern 702 are patterns for effect that change according to the change of the special symbol and stop according to the stop of the special symbol. Whether or not it is a big hit is notified by the stop mode of the production pattern 701 and the small pattern 702. - 特許庁

Also, the first image display device 70 displays a pending icon HA and the icon TI. The reservation icon HA is an icon indicating the reservation of the right to judge the jackpot related to the first special symbol, and four of them are displayed at maximum. Also, the icon TI is an icon indicating the current variation of the special symbol. The image displayed on the first image display device 70 will be detailed later.

The movable effect device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that are operable. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute an action effect. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, so that it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the action effect. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is positioned at a standby position (first position) near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and at a center side (lower side) of the first image display device 70. It moves (rises and descends) between the presenting position (second position). The second movable member 73b moves between a waiting position (first position) covering a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the fulfillment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending); A game ball storage unit 96 that stores game balls supplied from island facilities and supplies them to a payout device 95, a main control unit 110A that incorporates a main control unit 100, and a payout control device 120A that incorporates a payout control unit 120. , a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control unit 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, and a game information output terminal board for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer) 90 and the like are provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, the display device (first image display device, second image display device), and various lighting devices ( A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching between adjustment modes related to the adjustment of the light amount of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control device 110A, there is a main control unit 100 for controlling the game, and clearing the stored content of the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100 or the stage of the degree of advantage of the game (probability of being judged as a big hit). ) RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the setting value, setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode described later by operating the setting key, An information display 113 (see FIG. 5) for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance to be grasped, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute setting. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information indicating numeric values of values and performance information.

(Structure of game board)
Next, referring to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5. FIG.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a rear unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5 .

The board unit 500 has a game board 500a made of transparent resin on which the game area 5a is formed on the surface by the inner rails 35 and the outer rails 36 described above, and a window is formed so that the rear can be viewed. .

And inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-described decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the normal figure gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), the variable Starting portion 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning port 50, first big winning port detection switch 50a, First big winning opening opening/closing member 51, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b), and second variable winning part 55 (second big winning opening 56, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, second big winning opening opening/closing A member 57 and a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and the above-described main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a.

A certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 500a so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction about the left side. At the four corners of 500a, fixtures 503a for detachably attaching board unit 500 and back unit 501 are provided.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed by pinching the right side of the certificate stamp plate with the fingertips and rotating it leftward.

The fixture 503a includes an operation portion located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion and on the back side of the game board 500a. and an engaging piece positioned on the side thereof, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engagement posture) and a second state (engagement posture) by operating the operating portion. there is

The back unit 501 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front surface, and has a unit base 501a formed with a window portion for allowing the rear side to be visually recognized. , a movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. 130 A of production control devices are provided in the rear side of the 1st image display device 70, and 110 A of main control devices are provided under 130A of production control devices.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving portions 503b are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixtures 503a.

When attaching the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engagement posture). A male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided in the right side of the back unit 501 . After that, when the rear surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the rear surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a enters the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to set the engagement pieces to the second state (engagement posture), the engagement pieces are engaged with the fixed receiving portions 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are connected. is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the rear unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened. Thereafter, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to bring the engaging pieces into the first state, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixing receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are withdrawn from the fixing receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the work of removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of reuse of parts of the game machine 1. there is Therefore, here, the attachment and detachment of the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state in which the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the above.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the board unit 500 can be replaced. Therefore, when only the board unit 500 is to be replaced, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal work after opening the glass frame 4 .

(Overall block diagram of game machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the block diagram of the entire game machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

As the control configuration of the present embodiment, a main control unit 100 that controls overall progress of the game (basic operation), and payout control that controls payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control unit 100 Part 120, production control device 130A (production control unit 130) that controls the production related to the game based on the reception of the production control command from the main control unit 100, power supply that supplies power to the payout control unit 120 and production control device 130A A substrate 160 is provided.

In addition, the communication between the main control unit 100 and the payout control unit 120 is configured to be able to transmit and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control unit 100 and the production control device 130A (production control unit 130) A command can be transmitted only in one direction from the control section 100 to the production control device 130A (the production control section 130).

The main control unit 100 includes a main CPU 100a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 100b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 100c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 100 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a first large Winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, second big winning hole detecting switch 56a, second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, out ball detection switch 39a, main An information display 59, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, and an information display 113 are connected. The input/output port of the main control section 100 is connected to the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control section 120 and the performance control section .

The main CPU 100a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 100b, and uses the main RAM 100c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission and reception of various control commands. It performs control processing and the like for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

In the "game information", the starting opening winning signal output each time a game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is terminated. Symbol confirmation signal output every time, jackpot signal output over the jackpot game, open signal output over the round game (opening of the big winning opening), probability variable game state or time saving game state to be described later and a security signal output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threat) in terms of the security of the game machine 1 occurs.

In the memory area of the main ROM 100b, a game ROM area storing programs and data relating to the progress of the game and an information ROM area storing programs and data relating to performance display of the gaming machine are arranged in this order. there is

In the game ROM area, a game program area for storing a program relating to the progress of the game and a game data area for storing data relating to the progress of the game are arranged.

In the information ROM area, there are arranged an information program area in which a program relating to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored and an information data area in which data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored.

In the memory area of the main RAM 100c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed are arranged. ing.

In the game RWM area, a game work area used as a work by the game program and a game stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program are arranged.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area includes an information work area used as a work by the information program and an information stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the information program.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on an information program will be described. Describe relationships.

When the main CPU 100a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

The payout control unit 120 drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls. In addition, the payout control unit 120 drives the shooting device 26 to control shooting of game balls.

The payout control unit 120 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 120 include an open detection switch, a full detection switch, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 95, and a payout motor for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch for detecting that a game ball is stored in the game ball storage section 96 is connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control portion 100, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control portion 100, and the like are performed. conduct.

A ball feeding solenoid, a touch sensor, a firing volume, a firing solenoid, and the like are connected to the payout control unit 120 .

When the payout control unit 120 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid and the shooting solenoid, and the discharge from the shooting volume. When the detection signal detects that the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 has changed, the ball feed solenoid is driven, and the shooting solenoid is driven so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. It is designed to shoot balls (99.9/min).

Production control device 130A, production control unit 130 for comprehensively controlling the progress of production based on the reception of the production control command from the main control unit 100, image display and based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130 An image sound control unit 140 that performs sound output control processing, and a lamp control unit that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130 150.

The performance control unit 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an RTC 130d that measures the date and time, and an input/output port.

An input/output port of the effect control unit 130 is connected to the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the image sound control unit 140, detection signals from various input devices (detection switch etc.) Control processing corresponding to the output device and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting device, motor, etc.) are performed.

The image sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130, controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or controls the audio output device 9 to display a predetermined image. It controls the output of voice and sound.

The image sound control unit 140 includes a general CPU 141a that comprehensively controls image display and sound output based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130, a general ROM 141b that stores a general control program, and a general ROM 141b that stores a general control program. A supervising RAM 141c serving as a work area, a VDP 145 that generates images to be output to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the supervising CPU 141a, and image data. It has a CGROM 146 stored therein, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the general CPU 141a, and an audio ROM in which audio data and the like are stored.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the VDP 145, and output from the audio output device 9 Control processing and the like are performed for generating a voice control command for instructing the effect sound to be played and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 (sound LSI).

Also, the first image display device 70 , the second image display device 71 , and the audio output device 9 are connected to the image sound control section 140 . The image sound control unit 140 (the VDP 145 thereof) generates an image at predetermined frame time intervals (for example, 1/30 second) and outputs the generated image to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. . As a result, an image including, for example, the production pattern 701 and the like is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 . Further, sound is output by outputting an audio signal generated by (the audio control unit 148 of) the image sound control unit 140 to the sound output device 9 (speaker).

Moreover, the changeover switch 22 is connected to 130A of production|presentation control apparatuses. The changeover switch 22 is a switch for setting the volume value of the sound output from the sound output device 9 (description sound such as BGM or sound effects). For example, the volume value is set to five levels from "1" to "5" according to the operation of the selector switch 22. FIG. The selector switch 22 is also used as a switch for setting the light intensity values of the first image display device 70 , the second image display device 71 , the frame lighting device 10 , and the board lighting device 74 . The light amount value is set in five stages from "1" to "5" according to the operation of the changeover switch 22. FIG.

Also, the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the effect control device 130A.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect device 73, the board lighting device 74, the sub-information display device 80, and the effect button driving device 17b (effect button driving motor, effect button vibration motor). , effect button emission LED 17c is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. As a result, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the effect button drive device 17b, the effect button light emission LED 17c, the movable effect device 73 and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, Production control device 130A and various electronic components) (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has decreased (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 100 based on the decrease in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). It is provided with a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control unit 100 in the event of a power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, production control device 130A and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control unit 100 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control unit 100 when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped when the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value during output.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 100c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from the power failure (power failure), the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power failure (power failure). can be done.

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130, the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130 are arranged so that the storage contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage). A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control unit 130 . Also, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control unit 120 and the effect control unit 130 .

(Description of game state)
Here, the game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is the first probability, and a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is a second probability higher than the first probability. There is a state. Specifically, in a jackpot determination table used in jackpot determination, which will be described later, a jackpot random value determined as a jackpot is predetermined according to the game state. In the jackpot determination, when the random number for jackpot determination matches the random number value stored in the jackpot determination table, it is determined as a jackpot, and when they do not match, it is determined as a loss. The high-probability state is advantageous to the player because the probability of being judged as a big hit is higher than in the low-probability state.

The first probability and the second probability differ for each set value. For example, the setting value can be set from "1" to "4", and when the setting value is "1", the first probability is 1/300 and the second probability is 1/60. good. When the set value is "2", the first probability is 1/290, the second probability is 1/58, and when the set value is "3", the first probability is 1/280. and the second probability is 1/56, and when the set value is "4", the first probability may be 1/270 and the second probability may be 1/54. Note that the setting value may be settable within a range of, for example, "1" to "6".

Further, as the game state of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a non-assisted game state and an auxiliary game state. The auxiliary game state is a state in which winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is easier than in the non-auxiliary game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state (non-auxiliary game state)", in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal figure gate 44, the probability of being determined to be hit is 1/200. It is set to a low value, the variation time (average) of normal symbols is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to 0.18 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "auxiliary game state", the probability of being determined to be hit in the auxiliary game determination is set as high as 199/200, and the normal pattern fluctuation time (average) is set to about 3 seconds, and is determined to be hit. The opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 6 seconds. For this reason, game balls are more likely to enter the second starting port 47 than in the normal game state, the consumption (decrease) of the game balls is suppressed, and the big hit determination based on the winning to the second starting port 47 can be made in a short time. It will be repeatedly executed, and the state will be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In addition, the "auxiliary game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "normal game state" in terms of the average fluctuation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the probability of being determined to be winning. , the average variation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined as winning may be set to be advantageous.

In the following, the low probability state and non-assisted game state is called "normal game state", the high probability state and auxiliary game state is called "probability variable game state", and the low probability state and auxiliary game state is called "time saving game state". . The game machine 1 is initially set to a normal game state, and shifts to a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state when a jackpot game is played.

(Flowchart of main controller)
Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main controller)
Main processing (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control unit 100. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate 160 is input to the main CPU 100a.

First, the main CPU 100a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing set values based on a setting change operation, and a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 100c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming set values based on the setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 48b) Drive source initial operation processing and the like are performed for initializing the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, etc.). Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S51, the main CPU 100a updates the initial random number value for judging a big win, the initial random number value for judging a big winning pattern, the initial random number value for judging a winning pattern, and the initial random number value for determining a normal pattern.

In step S52, the main CPU 100a detects a voltage drop in the supply power from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the supply power that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S51, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 100a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power-off designation command for notifying the payout control unit 120 that power-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control unit 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the number-of-remaining-to-be-paidout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control unit 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 100a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in a payout control process of timer interruption, which will be described later. become.

The main CPU 100a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 100a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform data abnormality determination in the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 100a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 100c is backed up (restored power supply) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and in step S62 prohibits RWM access. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control unit)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control unit 100. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 100a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control units in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control unit 120 and the effect control unit 130 is waited for one second so that no command from the main control unit 100 is missed.

The main CPU 100a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 100c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control unit 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 120 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S16, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S17 assuming that the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the step is regarded as the first power-on or irregular power restoration. The process is moved to S18.

In step S17, the main CPU 100a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 100a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the setting value (probability of judging a big hit in judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is performed. Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 100a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first time the power is turned on or the power is restored irregularly, and the process proceeds to step S22. It will be.

In step S21, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (in-game) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (in-game) area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value (in-game) area is not within the proper range , the process proceeds to step S22.

The main CPU 100a performs unrecoverable error processing (game program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the effect control unit 130 , set interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control unit 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Notify of unrecoverable error" is to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 indicates that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An error sound (“This is an unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 100a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S26.

The main CPU 100a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. After the RWM clear process, the main CPU 100a performs the process of step S25. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 100a transmits a power-on command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, normal game state) to the payout control unit 120 and the effect control unit 130. The process is moved to S31. As a result, the effect control unit 130 performs processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" is to display the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "123") at the time of power-on for making the first image display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized. Alternatively, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In the power-on notification, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. You may make it display the display which alert|reports that.

In step S26, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S27 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S28.

The main CPU 100a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process for displaying on the information display 113 the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area is performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 100a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (0 clearing) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S29, the main CPU 100a transmits to the effect control section 130 a power restoration command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control unit 130 performs processing for executing power restoration notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Notification of power restoration" means that a power restoration image is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) in order to make the first image display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the power supply from the audio output device 9 is restored (from a power failure). A power recovery notification sound (buzzer sound) indicating that is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S30, the main CPU 100a transmits other commands (a command indicating a first reservation number U1, a command indicating a second reservation number U2, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control section 130. FIG. As a result, the production control unit 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 etc. is performed. Become.

The main CPU 100a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control section 130 in step S31. As a result, the effect control unit 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control section 130 before the power-on command and the power restoration command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 100a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S32, and permits all interrupts in step S33 to control the progress of the game (main control). (timer interrupt of unit 100) is started, and the current initialization processing is terminated.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. , cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. This eliminates the inconvenience caused to the game parlor and the player, and improves the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value (in-game) area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the setting was being changed, an unrecoverable error will occur even if the checksum is normal. By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game will not progress in a state where the setting value not intended by the game parlor side is set, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved. becomes possible.

Further, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, first image display device 70, and second image display are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. By checking the device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It is possible to recognize something. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that an open detection switch for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 is in an ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, unrecoverable error processing is executed. The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area and the process may be moved to step S24.

In addition, the power-on command and the power-recovery command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. A specified command may be transmitted.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing. .

(Setting change processing of the main control unit)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control unit 100. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 100a outputs a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting change is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S19-2, the state confirmation display 68 displays a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, the game clerk can confirm that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 100a transmits a setting change command to the effect control section 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control unit 130 performs processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The “setting change notification” means displaying a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or The device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) while the setting is being changed. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk checks the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the voice output device 9, and thereby grasps that the setting is being changed. becomes possible.

The main CPU 100a acquires the set value from the set value area in step S19-4, and determines whether the set value in the acquired set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4) in step S19-5. determine whether If the obtained set value is determined to be within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S19-7, and if it is determined that the obtained set value is not within the proper range, the obtained set value is determined to be in step S19-6. to "1".

The main CPU 100a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-7. Specifically, the acquired setting values (here, 1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, the game clerk can confirm the setting value before the change by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S19-8, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not there has been a set value update operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-9, and if there is no set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-12.

The main CPU 100a updates the obtained set value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs set value correction processing in step S19-10. Specifically, when the updated set value is "5" which exceeds the appropriate range (1 to 4), the set value is corrected to "1".

The main CPU 100a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-11. Specifically, the updated acquired set values (here, 1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to check the information display 113 to grasp the set value before confirmation.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S19-12. Specifically, various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first A process for initializing the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the setting change mode ends is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not there has been an operation to confirm the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a set value confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S19-14 assuming that the set value is confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no set value confirmation operation, the set value is updated. Assuming that there is a possibility that the

In step S19-14, the main CPU 100a saves the updated acquired setting value in the setting value area, ends the display of the setting value on the information display 113 in step S19-15, and, in step S19-16, The display of the status confirmation display 68 is terminated.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S19-18. Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources when the setting change mode is terminated by the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change processing.

In this way, even if the setting value is out of the proper range, the initial value is set as the setting value, so that an indeterminate value is set as the setting value and the gaming machine unexpectedly malfunctions. It is possible to prevent the game shop and the player from being troubled by the action, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, during the setting change (during the setting change mode), the game clerk operates the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, and the frame illumination on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. By checking the device 10 and the board lighting device 74, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It's becoming That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the game machine 1 .

Although the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, the set value confirmation operation may be performed by turning the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state, or by turning the dedicated switch OFF. Alternatively, the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control unit 100 so that the touch sensor 15a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state. A detection switch (for example, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in a specific winning opening (including a starting opening) may be changed from OFF to ON, or an open detection switch may be changed from OFF to ON. It may be assumed that the state is changed.

Also, a setting change command is transmitted at the start of the setting change process, and a power-on command is transmitted after the setting change process is completed. A setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the input command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of the main control unit)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control unit 100. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control section 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control unit performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the first image display device 70 displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 reads "Please press the RWM clear switch again". This is a notification such as outputting a notification sound for a predetermined period of time.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first Processing is performed to initially operate the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. The main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S24-4 when there is an RWM clear approval operation, and returns the process to step S24-2 when there is no RWM clear approval operation.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 100a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the set values) in the RWM area for the game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited. Become.

The main CPU 100a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-5. Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 100a terminates the initial operation of various drive sources, terminates the current RWM clear processing, and terminates the RWM clear preparation mode.

Note that the RWM clear preparation designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on command is transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed. You may make it transmit a command. In this case, the RWM clear specification command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear processing, or may be transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed.

(Setting confirmation processing of the main control unit)
Setting confirmation processing (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control unit 100. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S27-1, the main CPU 100a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and continues to be output for 200 milliseconds even after the setting confirmation is completed, before ending the output.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 100a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. FIG. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to confirm that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 100a transmits a setting confirmation command to the effect control section 130 in step S27-3. As a result, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control unit 130 is performed.

The "setting confirmation notification" means displaying a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting confirmation. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming the setting value") indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, the game clerk checks the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 74, and the voice output device 9, thereby grasping that the settings are being checked. becomes possible.

The main CPU 100a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S27-4. Specifically, the set value in the set value (in-game) area is referenced, and a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to grasp the current set value by checking the information display device 113 .

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S27-5. Specifically, various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first Processing is performed to initially operate the second prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the setting confirmation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various driving sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

In step S27-5, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process proceeds to step S28-7, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 100a ends the display of the set values on the information display 113 in step S27-7, and ends the display on the status confirmation display 68 in step S27-8. Then, in step S27-9, the main CPU 100a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources, ends the current setting confirmation processing, and ends the setting confirmation mode.

Although the setting confirmation command is transmitted at the start of the setting confirmation process, and the power restoration command is transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed, the setting confirmation start designation command is transmitted instead of the setting confirmation command, and the power supply is restored. Instead of (or in addition to) the recovery command, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting checking signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, from the start of power supply until the game is ready for game progress control (timer interrupt of the main control unit 100) (in the state before the start), input other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a Device (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening The presence or absence of signal input from the detection switch 56a, the magnetic detection sensor 57a, and the radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if game balls enter various prize winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalidated and the game balls are not paid out. It's like Also, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning becomes invalid and the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. No display is performed, and the jackpot game is not executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the passage is invalidated and the normal pattern display device 62 does not variably display the normal patterns, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play the game before the progress control of the game is started.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, error notification is not performed even if various errors occur. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that cheating is performed before the game progress control is started.

The setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control unit)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control unit 100. As shown in FIG.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control unit 100 every predetermined period (4 milliseconds). , and controls the progress of the game.

First, at the start of timer interrupt processing, the main CPU 100a saves information stored in a register to a stack area, and performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory.

The main CPU 100a performs random number update processing (game program) in step S100. Specifically, the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for judging the jackpot pattern, the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for judging the normal pattern, and the random number for judging the normal pattern fluctuation pattern are updated. I do. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to each random number value and random number counter and updating them is performed. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The initial random value to be used is set as a new cycle initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 100a performs a start opening detection switch process (game program). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the first starting port detection switch 45a or the second starting port detection switch 47a, and if there is an input, predetermined data is set. The details of the starting port detection switch process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs special symbol processing (game program) in step S300. Specifically, determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, etc. process. The details of the special symbol processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs gate detection switch processing (game program) in step S400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate detection switch 44a, and if there is an input, normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern variation pattern determination number) and store it. The gaming machine 1 can hold up to four normal pattern determination information, and when the number of normal pattern determination information currently reserved is less than 4, new normal pattern determination information is acquired.

The main CPU 100a performs normal symbol processing (game program) in step S410. The main CPU 100a performs processing such as determination of the acquired normal pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, control of variable display of normal patterns, and the like. Specifically, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the main CPU 100a performs an auxiliary game determination to determine whether or not it is a hit based on the normal pattern determination information acquired in step S400, and performs a normal game determination based on the determination result. The fluctuation time of the design is set, and the fluctuation display of the normal design is started on the normal design display device 62.例文帳に追加Further, when the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, it is determined whether or not the variation time has passed, and if the variation time has passed, the normal symbols corresponding to the result of the auxiliary game determination are stopped and displayed. In the auxiliary game state, the main CPU 100a determines that the win is achieved with a higher probability than in the normal game state in the auxiliary game determination.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal design determined as the determination result of the normal design determination information performed in the normal design process, the type of losing normal design is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning normal symbols and the selection ratio of various losing normal symbols determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal symbol processing are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 100a performs a jackpot game process (game program) in step S500. Specifically, when it is determined as a big win in the big win determination in the special symbol processing in step S300 and the big win symbols are stopped and displayed, a big win game of opening and closing the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56 is executed. do. Details of the jackpot game process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs auxiliary game processing (game program) in step S600. Specifically, when the auxiliary game determination in the normal symbol processing of step S410 determines that the winning is successful, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, the auxiliary game of opening and closing the second starting port 47 is executed. As a result, the second starting port 47 is opened. In addition, in the auxiliary game state, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is longer than in the normal game state.

The main CPU 100a performs payout control processing (game program) in step S700. Specifically, various switches (general winning opening detection switch 43a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a) are Based on the detection of the input, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 100c are referred to, and various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50 , a process for transmitting a payout amount designation command corresponding to the second big winning hole 56) to the payout control unit 120. As a result, the payout controller 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

The main CPU 100a performs abnormality determination processing (game program) in step S800. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as game balls winning in the second start port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, game balls winning in the big winning port when not in the special game, various winning Abnormal prize-winning error where the number of game balls that have won a prize does not match the number of game balls discharged from the prize-winning ball flow path, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error in which an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period of time, a door open error in which the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a during game progress control. , or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated), and performs processing for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the effect control unit 130. As a result, the effect control unit 130 executes processing for error notification.

The main CPU 100a performs data creation processing (game program) in step S810. Specifically, the external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second big winning Special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display device 62, third 1 special design reservation display 63, special design reservation display data to be output to second special design reservation display 64, normal design reservation display data to be output to normal design reservation display 65, and other data are created.

The main CPU 100a performs an output control process (game program) in step S820. Specifically, the external information data created in step S810, the start opening opening/closing data, and the port output processing for outputting signals such as the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol Reservation display data, display output processing for outputting signals such as normal symbol reservation display data, or sending a payment state confirmation designation command for checking the payment state of the payment control unit 120 to the payment control unit 120, or a prize described later Sphere counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) are referred to, and processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various prize openings to the payout control unit 120 is performed. . As a result, the payout control unit 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 . In addition, the main CPU 100a transmits various commands to the effect control section 130 for executing the set effect.

Next, the main CPU 100a saves the flag register in the game RWM area after prohibiting the interrupt, calls the target information program by the CALL instruction, and performs the processing from step S900.

Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs a game ball counting process (information program) in step S900. Specifically, the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, big winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, To count game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values). By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it is possible to make use of this in grasping the performance of the game machine 1 .

The main CPU 100a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S910. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game section is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The base storage area includes a first area for storing the normal base value in the current game interval, a second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, and a second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval. A third area for storing the normal base value in the interval and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the game interval three times before are provided. A base value will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 100a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S920. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data. Details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

In step S930, the main CPU 100a performs test data creation processing (information program). Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 100a performs an output control process (information program) in step S940. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S920 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S930 are performed. .

Then, the main CPU 100a restores the flag register from the game RWM area, permits the interrupt, and performs processing for returning to the game program. register, and terminate the current timer interrupt processing.

In this way, in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, and during the setting confirmation mode) before the progress control of the game is started, the timer interruption is not executed. Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control section.

(Starting port detection switch processing of the main control unit)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of the starting opening detection switch process executed in the game control section 100 will be described. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart of the starting port detection switch process in step S200 of FIG.

In step S201, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a signal has been input due to the detection of the game ball by the first start hole detection switch 45a (whether or not the game ball has won the first start hole 45). If it is determined that there is an input to the first starting port detection switch 45a, the process moves to step S202, and if it is determined that there is no input to the first starting port detection switch 45a, the process moves to step S208.

In step S202, the main CPU 100a determines that the first reservation number U1, which indicates the number of reservations for the right to determine the jackpot related to the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c, is set to a predetermined maximum number of reservations Umax1 (for example, 4). Determine whether it is less than If the first pending number U1 is less than Umax1, the process proceeds to step S203; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S203, the main CPU 100a updates the value of the first pending number U1 by adding "1".

In step S204, the main CPU 100a acquires special figure determination information (random number for judging a big hit, random number for judging a big hit pattern, random number for judging reach, random number for judging a special figure variation pattern), and determines the acquired special figure. Information is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the first special figure determination information storage area has first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a is vacant in order from the first storage area in the first special figure determination information storage area. The area is searched, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the vacant area.

In step S205, the main CPU 100a performs a first preliminary determination process (first look-ahead process) based on the special figure determination information acquired in step S204. It should be noted that this first pre-determination process is executed only in the normal game state. If the first pre-determination process has been executed, then the process proceeds to step S206; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S207.

The first pre-determination process is a process of pre-determining the special figure determination information before the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the special figure determination information acquired this time. Specifically, based on the special figure determination information acquired this time and the preliminary determination table, whether or not it is a big hit, and in the case of a big hit, the big hit design and the special figure fluctuation pattern are determined in advance.

Here, the preliminary determination table is a table containing the same random numbers as the big hit determination table used in the big hit determination process in the special symbol process. In addition, the advance determination table includes a table containing the same random number as the variation pattern table used in the special figure variation pattern setting process in the special symbol process.

In step S206, the main CPU 100a generates first look-ahead information for notifying the effect control unit 130 of the result of the first preliminary determination process, and sets it in the main RAM 100c. The first look-ahead information is transmitted to the effect control section 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, there is a case where the look-ahead performance (zone performance, start-time effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, icon change performance) is executed before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol relating to the winning of this time.

The main CPU 100a sets the first start winning command in the main RAM 100c in step S207. The first starting winning command is a command indicating that the game ball has won the first starting port 45 (that the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is suspended), and includes the first retention number U1. Further, when the first look-ahead information is set, the first start winning command includes the first look-ahead information. The first start winning command is transmitted to the effect control section 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number U1 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .

If "NO" is determined in step S201, if "NO" is determined in step S202, or if the process of step S207 is executed, the main CPU 100a executes the process of step S208.

In step S208, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a signal has been input due to the detection of the game ball by the second start hole detection switch 47a (whether or not the game ball has won the second start hole 47). If it is determined that there is an input to the second starting port detection switch 47a, the process proceeds to step S208, and if not, the starting port detection switch processing ends.

In step S209, the main CPU 100a determines that the second reservation number U2, which indicates the number of reservations for the right to judge a big hit related to the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c, is set to a predetermined maximum number of reservations Umax2 (for example, 4). Determine whether it is less than If the second pending number U2 is less than Umax2, the process proceeds to step S209; otherwise, the starting port detection switch process ends.

In step S210, the main CPU 100a updates the value of the second pending number U2 by adding "1".

In step S211, the main CPU 100a acquires the special figure determination information (random number for judging a big hit, random number for judging a big hit pattern, random number for judging reach, random number for judging a special figure variation pattern), and determines the acquired special figure. Information is stored in the second special figure determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the second special figure determination information storage area has first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a is vacant in order from the first storage area of the second special figure determination information storage area. The area is searched, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the vacant area.

In step S212, the main CPU 100a performs second preliminary determination processing (second look-ahead processing) based on the special figure determination information acquired in step S211. In addition, this second pre-determining process is executed only when the auxiliary game state (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). If the second pre-determination process has been performed, then the process proceeds to step S213; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S214.

The second pre-determination process is a process of pre-determining the special figure determination information before the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the special figure determination information acquired this time. Specifically, based on the special figure determination information acquired this time and the preliminary determination table, whether or not it is a big hit, the big hit design, and the special figure fluctuation pattern are determined in advance.

In step S213, the main CPU 100a generates second look-ahead information for notifying the effect control unit 130 of the result of the second preliminary determination process, and sets it in the main RAM 100c. The second look-ahead information is transmitted to the effect control section 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, there is a case where the look-ahead performance (zone performance, start-time effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, icon change performance) is executed before the start of the variable display of the second special symbol relating to the winning of this time.

In step S214, the main CPU 100a sets the second start winning command in the main RAM 100c. The second starting winning command is a command indicating that the game ball has won the second starting port 47 (that the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol has been suspended), and includes the second pending number U2. Further, when the second look-ahead information is set, the second start winning command includes the second look-ahead information. The second start winning command is transmitted to the effect control section 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number U2 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .

(Special symbol processing of the main control unit)
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S300 in FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart showing the process during stop in step S416 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 100a of the main control unit 100 determines whether or not a special game is in progress (a jackpot game is in progress) based on information stored in the main RAM 100c, for example (step S401). . When it is determined that the special game is being played (step S401: YES), the main CPU 100a ends the special symbol processing.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the special game is not in progress (step S401: NO), it determines whether or not the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is being variably displayed (step S402). If it is determined that the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the second reserved number U2 of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c is "1" or more ( Step S403), when it is determined to be "1" or more (step S403: YES), "1" is subtracted from the second reservation number U2, and only one reservation of the second special symbol is consumed (step S404).

Specifically, in step S404, the main CPU 100a shifts the data stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure determination information storage area so that the first to fourth storage The special figure determination information stored in the area is moved to the previous storage area.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage area of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage area of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. Also, the special figure determination information stored in the third storage area of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the second storage area of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. Also, the special figure determination information stored in the second storage area of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the first storage area of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. Also, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage area of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the determination area of the main RAM 100c.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the second pending number U2 is not "1" or more (the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is not pending) (step S403: NO), the main CPU 100a It is determined whether or not the first reserved number U1 of 1 special symbol is "1" or more (step S405), and when it is determined that it is "1" or more (step S405: YES), the first reserved number U1 "1" is subtracted to digest the reservation of the first special symbol by 1 (step S406).

Specifically, in step S406, the main CPU 100a shifts the data stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure determination information storage area so that the first to fourth storage The special figure determination information stored in the area is moved to the previous storage area.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage area of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage area of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. Also, the special figure determination information stored in the third storage area of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the second storage area of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. Also, the special figure determination information stored in the second storage area of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the first storage area of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. Also, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage area of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the determination area of the main RAM 100c.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 100a determines in step S405 that the first reservation number U1 is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S405: NO), the main CPU 100a sets the customer waiting command in the main RAM 100c, and executes the special symbol processing shown in FIG. finish. As a result, the customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130, and, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting command is received, the customer waiting effect is started on the first image display device 70. .

Following the processing of step S404 or step S406, the main CPU 100a executes the big win determination processing (step S407). In this big-hit determination process, big-hit determination for determining whether or not it is a big-hit, and symbol determination for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed (big-hit symbol or lost symbol) are performed. Specifically, the main CPU 100a first determines whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the special figure determination information (specifically, the random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the determination area and the jackpot determination table. make a judgment. The jackpot determination table stores a jackpot random value corresponding to the game state for each set value, and it is determined whether or not the game is a jackpot according to the current set value and game state.

When the main CPU 100a determines a big win based on the random number value for judging a big win, the main CPU 100a performs symbol judgment to judge a big win symbol (type of big win) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. In this symbol determination, a big hit symbol is determined based on the big hit symbol determination random number value stored in the determination area and the big hit symbol determination table. Then, the main CPU 100a sets the determined jackpot symbol in the main RAM 100c. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, the main CPU 100a sets a losing symbol in the main RAM 100c. Then, the main CPU 100a sets a special symbol specifying command corresponding to the set jackpot symbol or losing symbol in the main RAM 100c.

(Example of a jackpot pattern determination table)
Here, an example of the big hit symbol determination table will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol determination table used for jackpot symbol determination in the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18, when it is determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol (that is, the jackpot determination based on the winning to the first start port 45), one of the jackpot symbols A1 to A3 is determined. be done. Specifically, when it is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination related to the first special pattern, the jackpot pattern A1 is selected at a rate of 15%, the jackpot pattern A2 is selected at a rate of 50%, and the jackpot pattern A2 is selected at a rate of 50%. %, the jackpot pattern A3 is selected.

The jackpot pattern A1 is a jackpot pattern indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot. When the jackpot pattern A1 is stop-displayed, a round game of opening the second big winning port 56 for 29.5 seconds at maximum and then closing it for 2 seconds is repeated 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as "R")) 10R. A jackpot game is executed. When the 10R jackpot game ends, the variable probability game state is set. In one round game, when 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 56 before 29.5 seconds have passed since the start of the round game, the round game ends.

The jackpot pattern A2 is a jackpot pattern indicating a 4R probability variable jackpot. When the jackpot symbol A2 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which a round game of opening the first jackpot 50 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closing it for 2 seconds is repeated four times. When the 4R jackpot game ends, the variable probability game state is set.

The jackpot pattern A3 is a jackpot pattern indicating a 4R normal jackpot. When the jackpot symbol A3 is stop-displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which a round game of opening the first jackpot 50 for 29.5 seconds at maximum and then closing it for 2 seconds is repeated four times. When the 4R jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol (that is, the big hit determination based on the winning to the second start port 47), one of the big hit symbols B1 to B3 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination relating to the second special pattern, the jackpot pattern B1 is selected at a rate of 40%, the jackpot pattern B2 is selected at a rate of 25%, and the jackpot pattern B2 is selected at a rate of 25%. %, the jackpot pattern B3 is selected.

The jackpot pattern B1 is a jackpot pattern indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot, and when the jackpot pattern B1 is stop-displayed, after the 10R jackpot game in which the round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened is repeated 10 times is executed. , It is set to the probability variation gaming state. Also, the jackpot pattern B2 is a jackpot pattern indicating a 4R probability variable jackpot, and when the jackpot pattern B2 is stop-displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which a round game in which the first big prize winning port 50 is opened is repeated four times. After that, it is set to the probability variation gaming state. Also, the jackpot pattern B3 is a jackpot pattern indicating a 4R normal jackpot, and when the jackpot pattern B3 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which a round game in which the first big prize winning port 50 is opened is repeated four times. After that, it is set to the time saving game state.

It should be noted that the types of jackpots shown here are merely examples, and modifications may be made as appropriate. For example, in the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern A1, the first prize winning port 50 may be opened instead of the second prize winning port 56, or the first prize winning port 50 and the second prize winning port 56 may be opened. good. In addition, in the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbols A2 and A3, the second big prize gate 56 may be opened instead of the first prize gate 50, or the first big prize gate 50 and the second big prize gate 56 may be opened. may Also, in each jackpot game, a short opening round game in which the opening time of the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56 is short (for example, 2 seconds or less) may be performed one or more times.

Returning to FIG. 13, following the jackpot determination process of step S407, the main CPU 100a executes a special figure variation pattern setting process (step S408). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 14, the special figure variation pattern setting process will be described.

(Special figure variation pattern setting process)
As shown in FIG. 14, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a variable probability flag, which will be described later, is ON, that is, whether or not the state is a high probability state (step S461). When the variable probability flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a time saving flag, which will be described later, is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the auxiliary game state (step S462). When the time saving flag is OFF (step S462: NO), that is, in the normal game state, the main CPU 100a sets the normal table as the special figure variation pattern table in the main RAM 100c (step S463). When the time saving flag is ON (step S462: YES), that is, in the time saving game state, the main CPU 100a sets a time saving table as a special figure fluctuation pattern table in the main RAM 100c (step S464).

On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON (step S461: YES), that is, in the variable probability gaming state, the main CPU 100a sets the variable probability table as a special figure variation pattern table in the main RAM 100c (step S465).

The special figure variation pattern table is a table that defines the conditions for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern table contains multiple fluctuation patterns, the jackpot fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit, and when it is a loss and there is no reach (using a random value for reach judgment Loss variation pattern (no reach) selected when it is not decided to select a variation pattern for a predetermined variation time or more), when there is reach with a loss (a predetermined variation time using a random value for reach determination When it is determined to select the above variation pattern) includes the reach variation pattern selected. In addition, as an example of the special figure variation pattern table, an example of a normal table selected in the case of the normal gaming state and an example of the probability variation table selected in the case of the probability variation gaming state will be described later.

Following the processing of step S463, step S464, or step S465, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the result of the big win determination of step S407 is a loss (step S466). If the result of this big win determination is not a loss, that is, if it is a big win (step S466: NO), the main CPU 100a proceeds to the next step 468. FIG.

When it is determined that the result of the big hit determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the main CPU 100a performs ready-to-win determination processing (step S467). In the reach determination process, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not to select a reach variation pattern with a predetermined variation time or longer based on the obtained random number value for reach determination. After the process of step S467, the main CPU 100a executes the process of step S468.

In step S468, the main CPU 100a determines a special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 100a selects a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern determination random number value stored in the determination area of the main RAM 100c using the set special figure variation pattern table. More specifically, the main CPU 100a determines a variation pattern in which the special figure variation pattern determination random number matches the value set for each variation pattern included in the set special figure variation pattern table.

The determined variation pattern is set in the main RAM 100c as setting information (step S469). After the processing of step S469, the main CPU 100a ends the special figure variation pattern setting processing shown in FIG. 14, and advances the processing after step S409 of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 13, following the process of step S408, the main CPU 100a sets a variation start command in the main RAM 100c (step S409). The variation start command includes a special symbol designation command indicating the symbol set in the process of step S407, a special figure variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern set in the process of step S408, a game state designation command indicating the current game state, A first pending number U1 (U1 after subtraction in S406) and a second pending number U2 (U2 after subtraction in S404) are included. This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect associated with the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820. As a result, the variable production using the production pattern 701 is started.

Following the process of step S409, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol variation time (set counter value) set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the main RAM 100c (step S410), and the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol is started (step S411). Specifically, the main CPU 100a sets "1" to the counter value indicating the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation. This counter value is incremented by "1" each time YES is determined in step S402. This counter value is held in the main RAM 100c even if the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, and is updated from the value stored before the power cut-off when the power is restored again. Then, based on this counter value, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of step S810, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 . It should be noted that, when the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed following the processing of step S404, the variable display of the special symbols is performed using the second special symbol display 61, following the processing of step S406. When performed, the first special symbol display 60 is used.

When the main CPU 100a determines "YES" in the process of step S402 or executes the process of step S411, the main CPU 100a determines whether the variation corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of step S408 is performed from the start of the variation display in step S411. It is determined whether or not time has passed (step S412). Specifically, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the current counter value has reached the set counter value set in step S410.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the variable time has elapsed (step S412: YES), it sets a variable stop command for notifying that the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the main RAM 100c (step S413). The fluctuation stop command includes a pattern confirmation command indicating the result of the big hit determination (big hit pattern or losing pattern) set at the start of the special pattern fluctuation. In addition, the fluctuation stop command may include information indicating the game state designation command indicating the current game state, the first reservation number U1, and the second reservation number U2. This fluctuation stop command is a command for instructing the end of the production associated with the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the production control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820. As a result, the effect pattern 701, the small pattern 702, and the like are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect using the effect pattern 701 is terminated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 100a ends the variable display of the special symbols (step S414), and resets the elapsed time (counter value) (step S415). As a result, in the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, a symbol (a big winning symbol or a losing symbol) corresponding to the result of the big winning determination process of step S407 is stopped and displayed, and whether or not it is a big winning is displayed. be notified.

After the process of step S415, the main CPU 100a executes the process during stop (step S416). The details of the processing during suspension will be described later.

If "YES" is determined in step S401, if "NO" is determined in step S405, if "NO" is determined in step S412, or if the process of step S416 is performed, the main CPU 100a , end the special symbol processing.

(Stopping process by main control unit 100)
Next, the stop processing in step S416 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not it is a big win based on the result of the big win determination process in step S407 (step S480). Then, when the main CPU 100a determines that it is a big win (step S480: YES), it sets the big win game flag stored in the main RAM 100c to "ON" (step S481).

Following the process of step S481, the main CPU 100a sets the time saving flag and probability variation flag stored in the main RAM 100c to "OFF" (step S482). Following the process of step S482, the main CPU 100a starts opening (step S483) and sets an opening command in the main RAM 100c (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control unit 130 to perform an opening effect indicating that a jackpot game is to be started. sent to.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 100a determines that it is not a big hit (step S480: NO), it determines whether or not the time saving flag is set to "ON" (step S485). When it is determined that the time saving flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), "1" is subtracted from the auxiliary game residual number J stored in the main RAM 100c, and the J is updated (step S486). . The auxiliary game residual number J indicates the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols for which the auxiliary game state is maintained (the number of executions of the jackpot determination), and is set in the game state setting process executed after the jackpot game is performed. Details of the game state setting process will be described later.

Following the process of step S486, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the auxiliary game remaining number J is "0" (step S487). When determining that the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the time saving flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the process of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is not "0" (step S487: NO) , the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the variable probability flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

When determining that the variable probability flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the main CPU 100a subtracts "1" from the high probability game residual count X stored in the main RAM 100c, and updates the X. (step S490). The high-probability game residual count X indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is performed in the high-probability state, and is set in the game state setting process (described later) executed after the jackpot game is performed.

Following the process of step S490, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the high-probability game residual count X is "0" (step S491). When it is determined that the high-probability game residual count X is "0" (step S491: YES), the variable probability flag stored in the main RAM 100c is set to "OFF" (step S492).

When the process of step S492 is executed, when the process of step S484 is executed, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or the high probability game residual number X is "0 (step S491: NO), the main CPU 100a terminates the processing during stop of FIG.

(Jackpot game processing of the main control unit)
Next, the details of the jackpot game process executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a detailed flowchart showing the jackpot game process of step S500 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the jackpot game flag (special game flag) is ON (step S501). When the jackpot game flag is ON (step S501: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not opening is in progress (step S502). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game started in step S483 is in the process of opening.

If it is during the opening (step S502: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the opening time has passed (step S503). The opening time varies depending on the jackpot pattern. If the opening time has passed (step S503: YES), the main CPU 100a sets R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) to "0" according to the result of the jackpot determination process, and increases the value of Rmax. , the opening pattern (opening time, number of openings, interval time, etc.) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 50 or second big winning opening 56) is set (step S504).

Here, as described above, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot pattern, and the main CPU 100a sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot pattern.

Following step S504, the main CPU 100a adds "1" to R and stores it in the main RAM 100c (step S505). Next, the main CPU 100a starts opening control of the big winning opening based on the opening pattern set in step S504 (step S506), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the main RAM 100c (step S507). This round start command is transmitted to the effect control section 130 by executing the output control process of step S820. After the process of step S507, the main CPU 100a next executes the process of step S511.

On the other hand, if it is not during the opening (step S502: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether it is during the ending (step S508). If it is during the ending (step S508: YES), the main CPU 100a next executes the process of step S518. If it is not ending (step S508: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether it is an interval between round games (step S509). If it is during the interval (step S509: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the interval time has passed (step S510). to run. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S510: NO), the main CPU 100a terminates the jackpot game process.

On the other hand, if it is not during the interval (step S509: NO), that is, if the round game is being played, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (step S511). If the round end condition is not satisfied (step S511: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process.

The round end condition is that a predetermined time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has passed since the opening control of this round's large winning opening was started in step S506, or that the opening control of this round's large winning opening is performed in step S506. The number of winning prizes of game balls into the big winning opening after starting has reached a predetermined value (for example, 10). The main CPU 100a determines that the round end condition is satisfied when either one of these two conditions is satisfied.

If the round end condition is satisfied (step S511: YES), the main CPU 100a ends the opening control of the big winning hole in this round (step S512). Subsequently, the main CPU 100a sets a round end command (step S513). This round end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820.

Subsequently, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not R is equal to Rmax (step S514). That is, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S504.

When determining that R is not equal to Rmax (step S514: NO), the main CPU 100a starts measuring the interval time (step S515), and then ends the jackpot game process.

If it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S514: YES), the main CPU 100a starts ending (step S516) and sets an ending command in the main RAM 100c (step S517). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820.

When the main CPU 100a has performed the process of step S517 or determined YES in the process of step S508, it determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S516 ( step S518). If the ending time has passed (step S518: YES), the main CPU 100a executes a game state setting process (step S519). Details of the game state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process of step S519 is executed, the main CPU 100a sets the jackpot game flag (special game flag) to OFF (step S520).

If NO is determined in the process of step S501, if NO is determined in the process of step S511, if NO is determined in the process of step S518, if NO is determined in the process of step S503, the process of step S515 is executed. If so, or if the process of step S520 is executed, the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process shown in FIG.

(Game state setting processing by main control unit)
Next, the game state setting process in step S519 of FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process in step S519 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the type of the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot accompanied by transition to a high probability state (step S530). Specifically, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the variable probability big win is based on the big win symbols set in the big win determination process. If it is a probability variable jackpot (step S530: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON (step S531), sets the high probability game residual number X to Xmax, and sets the auxiliary game residual number J is set to Jmax (step S532). Xmax and Jmax are predetermined values, and a very large value such as 10000 is set as Xmax and Jmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set to X, the game is practically controlled in the variable probability game state until the next big win.

When the process of step S532 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S530, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the current jackpot is a normal jackpot accompanied by transition to the time-saving gaming state (step S533). When it is determined YES in step S533, the main CPU 100a sets the time saving flag to ON (step S534). Subsequently, the main CPU 100a sets, for example, "100" to the auxiliary game remaining number J (step S535).

When the process of step S535 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S533, the main CPU 100a ends the game state setting process shown in FIG.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control unit)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control unit 100 .

First, in step S920-1, the main CPU 100a displays the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step 920-2. If the display switching value is not "0", , the process proceeds to step S920-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not changed. It should be noted that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S920-2, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S920-4. If the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information is displayed. The process moves to step S920-3 to check whether the device 113 is lit. When this process is executed for the first time after the game machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step S920-3, the main CPU 100a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all the segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine data.

In step S920-4, the main CPU 100a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S920-5, the main CPU 100a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

In step S920-6, the main CPU 100a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S940 is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 100a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above in step S920-7, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds) in step S920-8. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S920-15. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has passed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S920-9.

In step S920-10, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not there is the lighting confirmed flag in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S920-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S920-11, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c. .

The main CPU 100a adds 1 to the above data selection counter in step S920-12, and determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 3) in step S920-13. If not larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S920-15, and if larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S920-14.

In step S920-15, the main CPU 100a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c in the above-described game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is terminated.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is out of order and which segment is out of order.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing display information of the information display in each game section. In the display information table of FIG. 20, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 flashes "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

Also, by the out ball detection switch 39a, the game ball that has won the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the out hole 39 Instead of detecting out-balls made up of game balls that have flowed into the outlet, only game balls that have flowed into the out-port may be detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a. In that case, out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch The number of outs (the number of total outs, the number of normal outs) should be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected at 56a.

(Reach production, special figure fluctuation pattern table)
Here, after explaining reach production, one example of the special figure fluctuation pattern table is explained.

Three production patterns 701 of left, middle and right are displayed on the first image display device 70, and three production patterns 701 start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern, and three production patterns 701 of the same kind are displayed. When all of them stop together (for example, "777" or "444"), it means that a big hit has been announced. In addition, the state in which three same kind of production patterns 701 are aligned is called "double eyes" or "symbol matching". When the game stops without the three same kind of effect symbols 701 being aligned, it basically means that a failure has been reported. A state in which the three different performance patterns 701 are stopped without the ready-to-win performance being performed is referred to as a "discrete eye" or a "normal loss". In addition, as a result of the ready-to-win effect, it is sometimes called "reach-to-miss" that the three same kind of effect symbols 701 are not aligned and a loss is reported.

The ready-to-win effect is an effect using the effect pattern 701 displayed on the first image display device 70, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big win. Specifically, the ready-to-win production is a production in which the same kind of production pattern 701 temporarily stops on the left and right, and the production pattern 701 fluctuates in the middle area. This is an effect that makes the player expect to stop in the area.

Here, the "temporary stop" is a state in which the production pattern 701 does not stop completely but slightly fluctuates (for example, swings up and down).

In this embodiment, the ready-to-reach effects include a normal ready-to-win effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “N reach”), an SP ready-to-win effect, an SPSP ready-to-win effect, and a special ready-to-reach effect. The N-reach production is the production with the lowest possibility of a big win afterward (also referred to as the degree of expectation for a big win or the degree of reliability) among a plurality of ready-to-win productions. For example, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the N-reach production is 1% or less. In addition, as the N-reach production, there may be a plurality of N-reach productions with different (or the same) performance time and/or the degree of expectation for a big win.

The SP reach performance is a performance with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the N reach performance, and is a reach performance with a longer performance time than the N reach performance. For example, the expected jackpot of the SP reach effect is 5 to 10%. In addition, there may be a plurality of SP reach effects as the SP reach effects. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on each SP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured such that the longer the effect time of the SP ready-to-win effect, the higher the expectation for the big win.

The SPSP ready-to-win production is a production with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the SP ready-to-win production, and is a ready-to-win production with a longer production time than the SP ready-to-win production. For example, the expected jackpot of the SPSP reach effect is 30 to 50%. In addition, there may be a plurality of SPSP ready-to-win effects as the SPSP ready-to-win effects. Depending on each SPSP ready-to-win performance, the degree of expectation for big win may differ, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured such that the longer the effect time of the SPSP ready-to-win effect is, the higher the expectation for the big win is.

Also, the special ready-to-win effect is the effect with the highest degree of expectation for a big win, for example, an effect suggesting a big win (determined effect indicating confirmation of a big win). That is, the special ready-to-win effect is an effect that is executed only when a big win is determined in the big win determination, and the degree of expectation for the big win is 100%. In addition, the special ready-to-win effect is also an effect suggesting the most advantageous jackpot game (10R probability variable jackpot game) for the player.

(An example of special figure fluctuation pattern table)
Next, an example of the special figure variation pattern table will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern table used when selecting a special symbol variation pattern in a normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, and when the jackpot pattern A1 is determined, the jackpot variation pattern is a variation pattern OP1 (variation time 30 seconds) and a variation. Any one of the pattern OP2 (variation time of 60 seconds), the variation pattern OP3 (variation time of 90 seconds), and the variation pattern OP4 (variation time of 120 seconds) is selected. Specifically, the variation pattern OP1 is selected at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern OP2 is selected at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern OP3 is selected at a rate of 88%, and the variation pattern OP4 is selected at a rate of 2%. selected. In the special figure variation pattern table, each variation pattern is assigned a random value for special figure variation pattern determination (changes in the range of 0 to 99), and the starting port (first starting port 45 or second starting port 47) The random number value for determining the special figure variation pattern obtained when the game ball to wins the variation pattern based on which of the random number values for determining the special figure variation pattern set in the special figure variation pattern table matches. selected.

The variation pattern OP1 is a variation pattern in which a normal reach (N reach) effect is performed by the effect control unit 130 as a reach effect. When the variation pattern OP1 is selected, after the three performance symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the same kind of performance symbols are temporarily stopped on the left and right to perform the N-reach performance, and the big win is notified. . In addition, the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the fluctuation pattern in which the N-reach production is performed may be referred to as "N-reach fluctuation".

In addition, before (or after) the N-reach production is started, a pseudo-variation production (pseudo-continuation) may be performed. In this case, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance as variation patterns for performing variation performances including N-reach performances and pseudo-variation performances. Here, the pseudo-run is an effect in which at least one of the three performance symbols 701 (for example, a pseudo-run symbol suggesting a pseudo-run) temporarily stops and changes again. The higher the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the expectation of a big hit. For example, a pseudo-continuation may be performed by temporarily stopping the three performance symbols 701 and then changing again, or the pseudo-continuous symbols suggesting the pseudo-continuation are temporarily stopped and the three performance symbols 701 are changed again. Pseudo reunion may be performed by Further, a pseudo-run may be performed by moving a predetermined image or a performance accessory during the variable display of the three performance patterns 701 .

For example, before the ready-to-win is established (the same kind of effect symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped), one or more pseudo-runs (re-fluctuations) are performed, and then the N-reach effect may be started. Alternatively, a ready-to-win state may be established without performing a pseudo-run, and then one or a plurality of pseudo-runs may be performed to establish a ready-to-win state again and the N ready-to-win effect may be started. In addition, one or more pseudo-runs are performed before the ready-to-win is established, then the ready-to-win is established, and then one or more pseudo-to-runs are performed, the ready-to-win is established again, and the ready-to-win production is performed. may It should be noted that the pseudo-continuation may be performed without any of the three performance symbols 701 temporarily stopping.

The variation pattern OP2 is a variation pattern in which a variation effect including an SP ready-to-win effect is performed as a ready-to-win effect. When the variation pattern OP2 is selected, three performance symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, N reach performance is performed, SP reach performance is performed after that, and a big hit is reported. It should be noted that the variation of the special symbol due to the variation pattern in which the SP reach effect is performed may be referred to as "SP reach variation".

The variation pattern OP3 is a variation pattern in which a variable effect including an SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed as a ready-to-win effect. Specifically, when the variation pattern OP3 is selected, the three performance symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach performance is performed, then the SP reach performance is performed, and then, An SPSP ready-to-win performance is performed, and a big win is announced. In addition, the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the fluctuation pattern in which the SPSP ready-to-win production is performed may be called "SPSP ready-to-win fluctuation".

When the variation pattern OP4 is selected, a variation effect including a special ready-to-win effect is performed. Specifically, when the variation pattern OP4 is selected, the three production patterns start to fluctuate in response to the start of fluctuation of the special design, and either N reach production or SP reach production is passed (or not passed) ), a special reach effect is performed, and a big hit is notified. The special ready-to-win production is a production that fluctuates in a state in which three production patterns 701 indicating a big win are aligned, and is a production that suggests a big win.

When it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, and when the jackpot pattern A2 or A3 is determined, the jackpot variation pattern is any one of the variation pattern OP1, the variation pattern OP2, and the variation pattern OP3. is selected. Specifically, the variation pattern OP1 is selected at a rate of 1%, the variation pattern OP2 is selected at a rate of 9%, and the variation pattern OP3 is selected at a rate of 90%. When the jackpot symbol A2 or A3 is determined, the variation pattern OP4 (variation pattern in which the special ready-to-win effect is performed) is not selected.

Also when it is determined to be a big hit in the big win determination related to the second special symbol, the same variation pattern as when it is determined to be a big win in the big win determination related to the first special symbol is selected. Therefore, the description of the case where it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol will be omitted. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit in the big win determination related to the second special symbol, a variation pattern different from the case where it is determined as a big win in the big win determination related to the first special symbol may be selected. For example, there may be an effect (second special symbol exclusive effect (jackpot)) that is executed only when it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol.

When it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, and the random number value for reach determination acquired when the game ball enters the starting port is, for example, 0 to 9, the reach variation pattern is a variation pattern RP1. (variation time: 28 seconds), variation pattern RP2 (variation time: 58 seconds), or variation pattern RP3 (variation time: 88 seconds) is selected. Specifically, the variation pattern RP1 is selected at a rate of 60%, the variation pattern RP2 is selected at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern RP3 is selected at a rate of 10%.

The variation pattern RP1 is a variation pattern in which a normal reach performance is performed, and when the variation pattern RP1 is selected, three performance symbols 701 start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, and then the same kind of performance symbols 701 on the left and right. is temporarily stopped, an N-reach performance is performed, and a loss is notified.

The variation pattern RP2 is a variation pattern in which an SP ready-to-win production is performed, and when the variation pattern RP2 is selected, three production patterns 701 start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern, and then the same kind of production patterns are displayed on the left and right. 701 is temporarily stopped and the N reach performance is performed, then the SP reach performance is performed, and a loss is notified.

The variation pattern RP3 is a variation pattern in which a variation performance including an SPSP reach performance is performed, and when the variation pattern RP3 is selected, three performance symbols 701 start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbols, and N reach performance. is performed, after that, an SP ready-to-win effect is performed, and after that, an SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed, and a loss is notified.

If it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, and the random number for reach determination is, for example, 10 to 99, a loss variation pattern is selected. Specifically, when the first reservation number U1 is "0" to "2", the variation pattern HP1 (variation time: 8 seconds) is selected, and when the first reservation number U1 is "3", the variation pattern HP2 (Variation time: 3 seconds) is selected.

The variation patterns HP1 and HP2 are variation patterns in which an effect indicating a normal failure is performed, and after the three performance symbols start to vary, the variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting a failure without performing a ready-to-win effect. is. Hereinafter, the fluctuation patterns HP1 and HP2 may be referred to as "normal loss fluctuation".

Also when it is determined to be a loss in the big win determination related to the second special symbol, the same variation pattern as when it is determined to be a loss in the big win determination related to the first special symbol is selected. For this reason, the explanation of the case where it is determined to be lost in the big hit determination relating to the second special symbol will be omitted. It should be noted that, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, a variation pattern different from that when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol may be selected. For example, there may be an effect (second special symbol exclusive effect (loss)) that is executed only when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination relating to the second special symbol.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern table used when selecting a special symbol variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the variable probability gaming state, when it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, and when the jackpot pattern A1 is determined, the variation pattern OP5 (variation time 40 second) or the variation pattern OP6 (variation time 50 seconds) is selected. Further, when the jackpot pattern A2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern OP5 or the fluctuation pattern OP7 (variation time 40 seconds) is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern. When the jackpot pattern A3 is determined, the fluctuation pattern OP7 is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the variable probability game state, when a big win is determined in the big win determination related to the second special pattern and the big win pattern B1 is determined, the variation pattern OP5 or the variation pattern OP6 is selected as the big win variation pattern. Further, when the big winning pattern B2 is determined, the variation pattern OP5 or the variation pattern OP7 is selected as the big winning variation pattern. When the big winning pattern B3 is determined, the variation pattern OP7 is selected as the big winning variation pattern.

The variation pattern OP5 is a variation pattern in which a battle ready-to-reach production is performed in which the player's own character and the enemy character fight each other, and as a result of the battle ready-to-win production, a draw production is performed in which the own character and the enemy character draw. . The draw performance is a performance suggesting a variable probability jackpot, and is a performance suggesting the possibility of a 4R variable probability jackpot.

The variation pattern OP6 is a variation pattern in which a battle ready-to-win effect is performed, and as a result of the battle ready-to-win effect, a victory effect in which the own character wins is performed. The victory effect is a effect suggesting a 10R probability variable jackpot.

The variation pattern OP7 is a variation pattern in which a battle ready-to-win effect is performed, and as a result of the battle ready-to-win effect, a defeat effect is performed in which the own character is defeated. The defeat effect is a effect suggesting the possibility of a 4R normal jackpot.

In addition, in the probability variable gaming state, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, the variation pattern HP3 (variation time 15 seconds) is selected as the loss variation pattern. Also, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, when the second reservation number U2 is "1" to "3", the variation pattern HP4 (variation time 2 seconds) or as a loss variation pattern When the variation pattern HP5 (variation time of 8 seconds) is selected and the second pending number U2 is "0", the variation pattern HP3 is selected as the losing variation pattern.

When the variation patterns HP3 to HP5 are selected, the three performance symbols 701 are varied without the battle reach performance being performed, and then stopped in a losing mode.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
Next, details of effect control based on various commands from the main control unit 100 will be described.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the effect control section 130. As shown in FIG. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control unit 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG.

The sub CPU 130a first executes command reception processing (step E10). The command reception process of step E10 is a process of controlling effects based on various commands from the main control unit 100. FIG. The effect control unit 130 receives a command from the main control unit 100, determines the content of the effect according to the received command, and causes the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the determined effect. A command is generated and set in the sub-RAM 130c. The details of the command reception process in step E10 will be described later.

Following step E10, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing (step E20). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since receiving the customer waiting command from the main control unit 100, the sub CPU 130a starts the customer waiting demonstration effect. In this case, the effect control section 130 stops the BGM being output and outputs the BGM for the customer waiting demonstration effect.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs command transmission processing for transmitting each command set in the sub RAM 130c to the image sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 (step E30). As a result, the image sound control unit 140 performs image display, sound output, and other effects, and the lamp control unit 150 controls the movable effect device 73, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the like.

(Command reception processing by production control unit 130)
Hereinafter, command reception processing executed in the effect control section 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 . FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step E10 of FIG.

First, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control section 100 (step E101). If the command has been received (step E101: YES), the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step E102, and if the command has not been received (step E101: NO), the current command reception process ends.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change command (step E102). If it is a setting change command (step E102: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing (step E103). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a sets a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the setting change notification is performed.

If step E103 is executed, or if NO is determined in step E102, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation command (step E104).

If it is a setting confirmation command (step E104: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing (step E105). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the setting confirmation notification is performed.

If step E105 is executed, or if NO is determined in step E104, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power restoration command (step E106).

If it is a power-on command or a power-restoration command (step E106: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs power-on notification processing (step E107). Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, the notification instruction command for executing the above-described power-on notification is set in the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power restoration command, , a notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification is set in the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the power-on notification or power recovery notification and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second An initial operation for operating the movable member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, and the like are performed.

If step E107 is executed, or if NO is determined in step E106, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related command (step E108).

Here, error commands include unrecoverable error commands, illegal winning error commands, abnormal winning error commands, magnetic error commands, radio wave error commands, door open error start commands, door open error end commands, operation error commands, etc. be.

If it is an error system designation command (step E108: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing (step E109). Specifically, error notification according to the type of received error command (non-recoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification etc.) is set in the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and various error notifications are performed.

When step E109 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step E108, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a starting winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command). (Step E110). Here, the starting winning command includes the first reserved number U1 and the second reserved number U2. Also, the start winning command may include the first look-ahead information or the second look-ahead information.

If the received command is a starting winning command (step E110: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes starting winning command processing (step E111). The start winning command process is a process that is executed when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 . The details of the start winning command process will be described later.

If step E111 has been executed, or if NO is determined in step E110, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a variation start command (step E112). If it is a fluctuation start command (step E112: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes fluctuation start command processing (step E113). The fluctuation start command process is a process executed when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. By performing the fluctuation start command process, the operation production at the start of the production pattern 701, which will be described later, is performed, and the fluctuation production using the production pattern 701 is started. Details of the fluctuation start command processing and specific examples of effects corresponding to the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

If step E113 has been executed, or if NO is determined in step E112, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation stop command (step E114). If it is a fluctuation stop command (step E114: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes fluctuation stop command processing (step E115). The fluctuation stop command process is a process executed when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the fluctuation stop command process, stop display of the production pattern 701 and the small pattern 702 according to the result of the big hit determination is performed, and the fluctuation production is terminated. Also, in the fluctuation stop command process, the effect of disappearing the icon, which will be described later, is performed. A specific example of an effect corresponding to this fluctuation stop command process will be described later.

If step E115 has been executed, or if NO is determined in step E114, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an opening command (step E116). If it is an opening command (step E116: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes opening processing (step E117). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a determines an opening effect indicating the start of a jackpot game, and sets a command for causing the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect in the sub RAM 130c. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the image sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

If step E117 is executed, or if NO is determined in step E116, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an ending command (step E118). If it is an ending command (step E118: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes ending processing (step E119). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a determines an ending effect indicating that the jackpot game is over, and sets a command for causing the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the ending effect in the sub RAM 130c. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

(Start winning command processing by production control unit 130)
Hereinafter, the starting prize winning command process executed in the effect control section 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 . FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting winning command process in step E111 of FIG.

The sub CPU 130a updates the first reservation number N1 or the second reservation number N2 stored in the sub RAM 130c, based on the received start winning command (step E111-1). Here, the first reservation number N1 is a value indicating the reservation number of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, and the second reservation number N2 is a value indicating the reservation number of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol. . The first reservation number N1 is updated (increased) based on the first reservation number U1 in the start winning command, and the second reservation number N2 is updated (increased) based on the second reservation number U2. Thereby, the first reservation number U1 stored in the main control unit 100 is set as the first reservation number N1, and the second reservation number U2 stored in the main control unit 100 is set as the second reservation number N2 be.

Next, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the result of the preliminary determination based on the first look-ahead information or the second look-ahead information in the received start winning command (step E111-2). For example, if the received start winning command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, the sub CPU 130a, based on the first look-ahead information, the result of the first preliminary determination process (whether it is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern, Special figure fluctuation pattern etc.) is determined. If the start winning command does not include the look-ahead information, steps E111-3 to E111-6 are not executed, and then step E111-7 is executed.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-3). The “icon change effect” is a suspended icon (first suspended icon or second suspended icon), or an effect in which the icon changes. Here, based on the result of the prior determination (whether it is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern, the special pattern variation pattern), the hold icon corresponding to the received start winning command is changed to a special mode different from the normal mode (blue, red, gold, rainbow color) and the scenario for that change. The determined scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to change the pending icon to the special mode based on the result of the preliminary determination and the effect random number. For example, when it is determined to be a big hit in the preliminary determination, the probability of determining to change the pending icon to the special mode is higher than when it is determined to be a loss. When determining to change the pending icon to the special mode, the sub CPU 130a further performs a lottery based on the icon change scenario table and the effect random number, and selects a scenario for changing the pending icon (final display mode and final display mode). process up to a suitable display mode). An example of the icon change scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs the start effect performance determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-4). Although the details will be described later, the effect production at the start is an example of a look-ahead continuous production that can be executed over the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols. is. The effect image is an image that emphasizes the effect pattern 701, and is, for example, an effect in which the effect pattern 701 emits light in a predetermined color. At step E111-4, the sub CPU 130a first determines whether or not the conditions for executing the look-ahead continuous effect are satisfied. The condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is that the ready-to-win effect is not performed in the reserved special design variation before the special design variation (pre-reading target variation) related to this winning is performed. . That is, the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is that the variation prior to the look-ahead target variation is a normal losing variation (any one of the variation patterns HP1 to HP5). When the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is established, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the effect effect at start by lottery based on random numbers, and determines to execute the effect effect at start. In this case, the scenario for the effect production at the start is determined by drawing lots using the effect production scenario table at the start. The determined scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. An example of the start effect presentation scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs zone effect determination processing based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-5). Although the details will be described later, the zone effect is an example of a look-ahead continuous effect that can be executed over a plurality of variations of special symbols, and is an effect that accompanies a change in the background image. Here, when the conditions for executing the look-ahead continuous effect are established, the sub CPU 130a determines by lottery whether or not to execute the zone effect, and when it is determined to execute the zone effect, the zone effect is determined. A scenario for zone performance is determined by lottery using a scenario table. The determined scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. An example of the zone effect scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs a chance effect determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-6). Although details will be described later, the chance eye effect is an example of a look-ahead continuous effect that can be executed over a plurality of special symbol variations, and by stopping the three effect symbols 701 in a specific combination, the next and subsequent special symbols It is a production that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit in the fluctuation of Here, when the conditions for executing the look-ahead continuous effect are satisfied, the sub CPU 130a determines by lottery whether or not to execute the chance effect, and when it is determined to execute the chance effect, The scenario of chance presentation is determined by lottery using a chance presentation scenario table. The determined scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. An example of the chance presentation scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a additionally displays a pending icon (step E111-7). In the icon change effect determination process of step E111-3, if it is determined to display the suspended icon in a special manner when additionally displaying the suspended icon, the sub CPU 130a additionally displays the suspended icon in the determined manner. set command. When the command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140, an additional icon display effect for additionally displaying the first pending icon or the second pending icon corresponding to the start winning command is executed. The details of the additional icon display effect will be described later. In addition, the sub CPU 130a, based on the number of pending icons currently displayed and the first pending number N1 or the second pending number N2 updated in step S111-1, confirms their consistency, When inconsistency occurs, control is performed so that the number of reserved icons matches the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2. This control will be described later.

After executing the process of step E111-7, the sub CPU 130a ends the process shown in FIG.

(Example of icon change scenario table)
An example of the icon change scenario table will now be described. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an icon change scenario table. In addition, here, the case where the first reservation number N1 is "4" and the special figure fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach production is performed as the special figure fluctuation pattern is pre-determined will be described.

In FIG. 26, "before 4 fluctuations" indicates the fluctuations of special symbols 4 before the fluctuation of the received start winning command, and "before 3 fluctuations" is the fluctuation of the special symbols according to the received starting winning command. Shows three fluctuations before, "2 fluctuations before" shows the fluctuations two before the fluctuation of the special symbol according to the received start winning command, "1 fluctuation before" is the received special symbol related to the start winning command It shows the variation just before the symbol variation. In addition, "the change concerned" shows the change of the special design which relates to the start winning a prize command which is received. Colors such as “blue” and “red” described in each pattern indicate the pending icon or the color of the icon in the period of each change.

For example, in Scenario 1, everything from "before 4 changes" to "this change" is "blue". This indicates that when the first pending icon corresponding to the winning this time is additionally displayed, it changes to "blue" and then maintains "blue". Further, for example, in Scenario 9, when the first reserved icon corresponding to the winning this time is additionally displayed, it is displayed in the normal mode, and is displayed in the normal mode even in the case of "before 3 changes", and in the case of "before 2 changes". , it changes from the normal mode to 'blue', and '1 change before' changes from 'blue' to 'red'. Scenario 15 is also displayed in the normal mode when the first pending icon corresponding to the winning this time is additionally displayed, and is displayed in the normal mode even in "before 3 changes" and "before 2 changes". It shows a change from the normal mode to "red" in "1 change before", and a change from "red" to "gold" in "this change".

As is clear from the figure, when it is determined as a jackpot as a result of the preliminary determination, the selection rate of the final display mode is gold > red > blue, and when it is determined as a loss, the final The selectivity of typical display modes is blue>red>gold. For this reason, as for the display mode of the pending icon or the icon, the expectation of a big win is higher in the order of "gold", "red", and "blue". In addition, since "Rainbow" is selected only in the case of a big win, the degree of expectation for a big win of "Rainbow" is 100%. Also, the "rainbow" can change only in the "relevant variation". That is, there is a possibility that the icon will not change to "rainbow" while it is displayed as the first pending icon, and that it will change to "rainbow" only when it is displayed as the icon.

Note that FIG. 26 is merely an example, and the effect control unit 100 stores an icon change scenario corresponding to the number of reservations and the special figure variation pattern. For example, the number of reservations is "4", and the SP reach icon change scenario table corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern OP2 or RP2 in which the SP reach effect is performed, the number of reservations is "4", and N reach An icon change scenario table or the like for N reach corresponding to the special figure variation pattern OP1 or RP1 in which the production is performed is prepared in advance. Each table has a different selection ratio for each aspect of the icon. For example, in the icon change scenario table for SP reach and the icon change scenario table for N reach, the ratio of selecting "gold" as the final display mode may be "0". In this case, when the pending icon or the icon changes to "gold", the SPSP ready-to-win effect is always developed. In addition, instead of preparing a plurality of icon change scenario tables corresponding to the number of reservations and the special figure variation pattern, one icon change scenario table including conditions related to the number of reservations and the special figure variation pattern may be prepared. .

(An example of an effect production scenario table at the start)
Here, an example of the start-time effect production scenario table will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a starting effect rendering scenario table. In addition, here, the case where the first reservation number N1 is "4" and the special figure fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach production is performed as the special figure fluctuation pattern is pre-determined will be described.

Although the details will be described later, there are, for example, two modes of "blue" and "red" in the mode of the effect presentation at the start, and red indicates that the expectation of big win is higher than that of blue.

As shown in FIG. 27, for example, in Scenario 1, everything from “before 3 fluctuations” to “current fluctuation” is “blue”. This means that the current special symbol fluctuation (4 fluctuations before) is completed, and the next special symbol fluctuation (that is, 3 fluctuations before) is performed at the start of the "blue" mode effect production, and "2 fluctuations before ” and “before 1 change”, the “blue” mode start effect presentation is performed, and “this change” also indicates that the “blue” mode start effect presentation is performed. In Scenario 14, the "blue" aspect of the starting effect presentation is performed in "before one change", and the "red" aspect of the starting effect presentation is performed in the "current variation".

As is clear from the figure, as a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined to be a big hit, red is more likely to be selected than blue as the mode of effect production at the start, and when it is determined to be a loss, at the start Blue is more likely to be selected than red as a form of effect production. Therefore, as a mode of effect production at the start, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in "red" than in "blue". It should be noted that there may be a plurality of modes other than these as the mode of the effect presentation at the start.

As in FIG. 26, the table in FIG. 27 is merely an example, and an SP reach starting effect production scenario table and an N reach starting effect production scenario table are prepared. In each table, the ratio of selecting the "blue" mode and the "red" mode differs. For example, in the N-reach starting effect presentation scenario table, even in the case of a big win, the probability of selecting the "red" mode is low, for example, "0". It should be noted that the effect control unit 130 may store in advance an effect production scenario table at the start in which the table for SPSP reach, the table for SP reach, and the table for N reach are combined. Also, it is not necessary to divide the tables according to the number of reservations, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of reservations.

(Example of zone production scenario table)
An example of the zone effect scenario table will now be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a zone effect scenario table. In addition, here, the case where the first reservation number N1 is "4" and the special figure fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach production is performed as the special figure fluctuation pattern is pre-determined will be described.

The zone production has, for example, two modes of "strong zone" and "weak zone", and the "strong zone" indicates that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the "weak zone".

As shown in FIG. 28, for example, in Scenario 1, everything from "3 fluctuations before" to "current fluctuation" is a "weak zone". This means that the current special symbol fluctuation (before 4 fluctuations) is completed, and the next special symbol fluctuation (that is, before 3 fluctuations) is performed with "weak zone effect", and "before 2 fluctuations" and "1 fluctuations" are performed. It shows that the "weak zone effect" is performed also in "before", and the "weak zone effect" is performed also in the "current change". Further, for example, scenario 7 indicates that a "weak zone" effect is performed at "before one change" and a "strong zone effect" is performed at "this change".

As is clear from the figure, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the preliminary determination, the "strong zone effect" is more likely to be selected than the "weak zone effect" as the mode of zone effect, and it is determined to be a loss. In this case, the "weak zone effect" is more likely to be selected than the "strong zone effect". Therefore, the "strong zone effect" has a higher expectation for a big hit than the "weak zone effect". It should be noted that there may be a plurality of modes other than these as modes of zone production.

As in FIG. 26, the table in FIG. 28 is merely an example, and a zone effect scenario table for SP reach and a zone effect scenario table for N reach are prepared. ” and “weak zone effect” are selected. For example, in the N-reach zone effect scenario table, even in the case of a big win, the probability of selecting "strong zone effect" is low, for example, "0". A zone effect scenario table in which the table for SPSP reach, the table for SP reach, and the table for N reach are combined into one may be stored in the effect control unit 130 in advance. Also, it is not necessary to divide the tables according to the number of reservations, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of reservations.

(An example of a chance scenario table)
Here, an example of the chance presentation scenario table will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a chance presentation scenario table. In addition, here, the case where the first reservation number N1 is "4" and the special figure fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach production is performed as the special figure fluctuation pattern is pre-determined will be described.

There are, for example, two modes of "blue" and "red" in the mode of the chance eye presentation, and red indicates that the expectation of big win is higher than that of blue.

As shown in FIG. 29, for example, in Scenario 1, everything from “before 3 changes” to “this change” is “blue”. This means that the current special symbol fluctuation (before 4 fluctuations) is completed, and the next special symbol fluctuation (that is, before 3 fluctuations) is performed with a chance effect in the "blue" mode, and "before 2 fluctuations". and "before 1 change", the "blue" aspect of the chance game effect is performed, and also in the "current change", the "blue" mode of the chance game effect is performed. Further, in the scenario 14, a "blue" aspect of the chance effect is performed in the "1 change before", and a "red" aspect of the chance effect is performed in the "current change".

As is clear from the figure, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the preliminary determination, red is more likely to be selected than blue as a mode of chance eye production, and when it is determined as a loss, red is more likely to be selected. Blue is more likely to be selected. Therefore, as a mode of the chance eye presentation, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in "red" than in "blue". It should be noted that there may be a plurality of modes other than these as the mode of the chance presentation.

As in FIG. 26, the table in FIG. 29 is merely an example, and an SP reach chance effect scenario table and an N reach chance effect scenario table are prepared. ” mode and the rate of selecting the “red” mode are different. For example, in the N-reach chance effect scenario table, even in the case of a big win, the probability of selecting "blue" is low, for example, "0". Note that the effect control unit 130 may store in advance a chance effect scenario table in which the table for SPSP reach, the table for SP reach, and the table for N reach are combined into one. Also, it is not necessary to divide the tables according to the number of reservations, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of reservations.

(Variation start command processing by production control unit 130)
Hereinafter, the fluctuation start command processing executed in the effect control section 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 . FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the change start command process in step E113 of FIG.

The sub CPU 130a analyzes the received variation start command, determines the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot pattern or losing pattern), the special figure variation pattern, the current game state, the first reservation number U1, and the second reservation number U2 ( Step E113-1).

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode setting process (step E113-2). Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment there are a plurality of production modes corresponding to the normal gaming state, production modes corresponding to the variable probability gaming state, and production modes corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. Here, when the effect mode indicating the normal game state is currently set, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the condition for changing the effect mode is satisfied. change. The effect mode change condition may be, for example, that a predetermined number of big hit determinations have been made since the current effect mode was set, or that a specific effect has been performed in the immediately preceding special symbol variation. In addition, each of a plurality of production modes in the same game state may be called a "stage". That is, in step E113-2, when the production mode change condition (stage change condition) is established, one of the stages in the production mode indicating the normal game state is selected and selected. A stage is set. Also, if the current effect mode does not correspond to the current game state determined in step E113-1, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect mode corresponding to the game state.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines a variation effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern (step E113-3). A variation performance pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern is stored in the performance control unit 130, and the variation performance pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern is determined. For example, when the special figure variation pattern is the variation pattern OP3, the variation performance pattern including the SPSP ready-to-win performance is determined as the variation performance pattern.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice effect based on the variable effect pattern (step E113-4). For example, the notice effect includes a speech notice suggesting the possibility of a big win, a step-up notice, a cut-in notice, and the like. In addition, the advance notice effect includes a fixed effect suggesting a big hit. The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the special figure variation pattern, and determines which notice effect is performed at what timing of the change effect.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines the action effect at the start (step E113-5). The action effect at the start is a effect using the effect pattern 701 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. The details of the action effect at the start will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines a pre-stop action effect (step E113-6). The pre-stop motion effect is a effect using the effect symbol 701 performed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The details of the pre-stop action effect will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon change effect (step E113-7). Here, setting of the pending icon or the icon change effect for changing the icon is performed according to the scenario determined in the icon change effect determination process. For example, when it is decided to change the pending icon in this special symbol change, the sub CPU 130a determines the timing of changing the pending icon, the form of the icon change suggestion effect performed before changing the pending icon, and the like. set. As a result, the icon change effect is performed during the change of the special symbol this time. Further, the sub CPU 130a sets the mode of the icon movement display effect for moving and displaying the pending icon. The details of the icon movement display effect will be described later.

In the above description, the display mode of the icon is determined in the icon change effect determination process of the starting winning command process. may be determined in the process of this step E113-7. That is, the display mode of the icon may be determined when the special symbol associated with the icon starts to change.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets zone effects (step E113-8). Here, control of the zone effect is performed according to the scenario determined in the zone effect determination process. For example, when it is determined to start the zone effect or change the mode of the zone effect in the current variation of the special symbol, the sub CPU 130a determines the timing to start the zone effect and the timing to change the mode of the zone effect. , set the mode of the zone suggestive effect to be performed before starting (or changing) the zone effect. Thereby, the control (start or change) of the zone production is performed during the fluctuation of the special symbol of this time.

In the above, in the zone effect determination process of the start winning command process, the zone effect (whether or not there is a zone effect and its mode) in the change of the prefetch target is determined, but in the zone effect determination process, rather than the change of the prefetch target The zone effect in the previous variation is determined, and the zone effect in the look-ahead target variation may be determined in the process of step E113-8. That is, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, it may be determined whether or not the zone effect is to be performed in the fluctuation, and the mode thereof.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect presentation at the start (step E113-9). Here, when it is determined in the start effect production determination process that the start effect production is to be executed in the current variation of the special symbol, the sub CPU 130a sets the start effect production. As a result, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the start effect production is performed.

It should be noted that, in the above, in the starting effect effect determination processing of the start winning command process, the start effect effect (whether or not the start effect effect is executed and its mode) in the change of the look-ahead target is determined. In the effect presentation determination process, the effect presentation at the start of the variation prior to the look-ahead target variation may be determined, and the start-time effect presentation of the look-ahead target variation may be determined in the processing of step E113-9. That is, at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol, whether or not to perform the effect presentation at the start in the variation, and its mode may be determined.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets the chance effect (step E113-10). Here, when it is determined in the above-described eye-of-chance effect determination process that the eye-of-chance effect is to be executed in the current variation of the special symbol, the sub CPU 130a sets the eye-of-chance effect. As a result, the chance effect is performed before the special symbols stop changing.

Next, the sub CPU 130a updates the first reservation number N1 or the second reservation number N2 (step E113-11). Thereby, when the fluctuation start command is a command indicating the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the first reservation number N1 is subtracted by "1", and when the command indicates the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the second 2 The pending number N2 is decremented by "1". The sub CPU 130a confirms the consistency of these based on the number of currently displayed pending icons and the first pending number N1 or the second pending number N2 updated in step S113-11, and When inconsistency occurs, control is performed so that the number of reserved icons matches the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2. This will be detailed later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets various commands for executing each set effect (step E113-12). By transmitting various commands to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, each set effect is executed.

(Timer interrupt processing of image sound control unit)
Next, timer interrupt processing performed in the image sound control unit 140 will be described.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the image sound control unit 140. FIG. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the general CPU 141a of the image sound control section 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG.

The supervising CPU 141a performs changeover switch processing (step E401). Here, when the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk is operated, the volume value and/or the light amount value are adjusted. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the changeover switch 22 has been operated based on the signal from the changeover switch 22, and if the changeover switch 22 has been operated, the voice output device 9 output sound (BGM and effect sound) volume value, the light amount value of the backlight of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 Adjust the light intensity value. The volume value and light amount value can be set within a predetermined adjustment range (eg, 1 to 5).

Next, the supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing (step E402). Here, the volume value of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 is adjusted in accordance with the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Specifically, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the left button 192A or the right button 194A of the cross key 19 is pressed based on the signal from the cross key detection switch 19a. When pressed, the volume value is adjusted within the predetermined adjustment range.

Next, the supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing (step E403). Here, in response to the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the amount of light of the backlight of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, the lighting device 10 for the frame, and the board Adjustment of the light quantity value of the illumination device 74 is performed. Specifically, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the up button 191A or the down button 193A of the cross key 19 is pressed based on the signal from the cross key detection switch 19a, and determines whether the up button 191A or the down button 193A is pressed. When pressed, the light amount value is adjusted within the predetermined adjustment range.

At the start and end of the variable effect, the adjustment of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is restricted (suppressed). Also, during the period from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the main control unit 100 starts controlling the game (for example, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, during the board unit 500 During the initial operation of each drive source, etc.), adjustment of the sound volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key 19 is restricted.

Next, the supervising CPU 141a sets animation (step E404). Specifically, when a command instructing execution of various effects is received from the effect control unit 130, the overall CPU 141a determines an animation corresponding to the received command.

Next, the supervising CPU 141a sets the sound (step E405). Specifically, when a command instructing execution of various effects is received from the effect control unit 130, the overall CPU 141a determines a sound corresponding to the received command.

Next, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the frame time has elapsed (step E406). Here, the frame time is the time for displaying one frame of image, and is, for example, 1/30 second. That is, here, it is determined whether or not it is the frame update timing for updating the images displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 .

If the frame time has passed (step E406: YES), the supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing (E407). Here, the supervising CPU 141a causes the VDP 145 to generate an image according to the set animation. As a result, an image next to the currently displayed image is generated and displayed. By generating and displaying one frame image at intervals of a frame time (for example, 1/30 second), for example, on the first image display device 70, how the effect pattern 701 fluctuates and how the pending icon moves is displayed. will be A specific example of effects displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described later.

For example, when the main control unit 100 starts the variable display of the special symbols, the main control unit 100 transmits a variable start command. The production control unit 130 receives this fluctuation start command, and the fluctuation production pattern is determined by the above-mentioned fluctuation start command processing. Then, a command for starting execution of the variable effect is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 to the image sound control unit 140, and the image is generated by the VDP 145 at the next frame update timing after the command is received. Therefore, the start timing of the variable performance using the performance pattern 701 is delayed from the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols. In addition, the start timing of the effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130 and the lamp control unit 150 (for example, display using the sub-information display device 80) may deviate from the start timing of the variable effects using the effect pattern 701. If there is, it may match.

Next, the overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing (step E408). As a result, a dramatic sound is output. The description of the processing shown in FIG. 31 ends here.

(Timer interrupt processing of lamp controller)
Next, timer interrupt processing performed in lamp control unit 150 will be described.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in lamp control section 150. Referring to FIG. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the ramp CPU 150a of the ramp control unit 150 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG.

The lamp CPU 150a controls the display of the sub information display 80 (step E501). For example, the lamp CPU 150a receives a command indicating the start of variation from the effect control unit 130 when the effect control unit 130 receives the command to start the variation of the first special symbol. In response to the command, the lamp CPU 150a flashes the LED of the first sub-variation display 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 0.5-second cycle), thereby performing a variation display using the first sub-variation display 81. I do. After the effect control unit 130 receives the variation start command, the lamp CPU 150a continues the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 . Further, when the effect control unit 130 receives the command to stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the lamp CPU 150a receives a command indicating the stop of the change from the effect control unit 130, and responds to the command by the first sub-variation indicator 81. Ends the variable display using .

Further, the lamp CPU 150a controls the movable effect device 73 in step E502. The lamp CPU 150a operates the movable effect device 73 at the timing determined by the effect control section 130. FIG.

The lamp CPU 150a also controls other devices in step E503. For example, the lamp CPU 150a causes the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a predetermined manner, the board lighting device 74 to emit light, or the button driving device 17b to operate at the timing determined by the effect control unit 130 to produce effects. The button 17 is operated, or the performance button emission LED is caused to emit light.

Next, specific examples of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change, RWM clear preparation, setting confirmation, after setting change, after RWM clear, and after setting confirmation will be described.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change)
With reference to FIG. 33, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various driving sources during setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At timing T1, when a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a turned on, RWM clear switch 111a turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control unit 100 starts a setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, a setting change notification is displayed to confirm that the setting is being changed and to confirm the operation of various drive sources (display of the screen during setting change, voice during setting change "Setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (“4” in this case) is displayed on the 7-segment display 113 d at the right end of the information display 113 .

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of various driving sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various driving sources is stopped (driving source = OFF), and thereafter various driving is performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of the source are repeated.

At the timing of T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed in a state in which the operation time of the various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are activated. As soon as it is finished, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the setting value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control unit 100 shifts from the pre-start state to a game-ready state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, the initial operation of various production accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control unit 130 is started, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various performance accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various driving sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control unit 100 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice).

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control unit 100 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, the initial operation of various production accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control unit 130 is started, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various performance accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation)
With reference to FIG. 35, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At timing T1, when a setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned on) when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control unit 100 starts a setting confirmation mode to start controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "Setting confirmation in progress" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (“4” in this case) is displayed on the 7-segment display 113 d at the right end of the information display 113 .

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed before the operating time of the various driving sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated. At the same time, the operation of various driving sources immediately stops (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources ends, and the display of the set values on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 also ends. do. Then, the main control unit 100 shifts from the pre-start state to a game-ready state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display device 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols pending number, display of normal symbols pending number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power supply restoration notification is started. be started. In addition, the initial operation of various production accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control unit 130 is started, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various performance accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating member 51, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) Therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (including the replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) ), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is activated. Information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, and right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that it is possible not to impose an extra processing burden on the main control unit 100, and various drive sources It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it prompts the user to confirm that the settings are being changed and to check the operation of the various driving sources. setting change notification for RWM clear preparation (RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of operation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of setting and confirmation of operation of various drive sources) Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. It is possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.) without creating a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the pre-start state ends due to the set value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation is immediately completed even before the operation time of various drive sources has elapsed. Since the operation of the various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources will not be performed in the state where the game can be played, and it will be confused with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various driving sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED is extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the big prize opening LED, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 and the Since the open signal is not output even though the second big winning hole is open, it is possible to prevent the main control part 100 from being given an extra processing load, and the game machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the game progress control is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control unit 100 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RWM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources is prompted by "initializing the drive source" or "please check the operation of the solenoid". characters are not displayed, but such characters may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on after the progress control of the game is started to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 36, various operation timings (initial operation, initial operation, Big hit game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) are compared. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing operation comparison at various operation timings of various drive sources.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is the same as that of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the jackpot game operation. The value is smaller than the driving time of the opening/closing solenoid 57b once. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

In addition, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b at the time of the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time at the time of the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, one drive time of the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is the same value or substantially the same (similar) as the driving time of one time during the jackpot game operation. can be a value. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, thereby improving the accuracy of operation confirmation. It is possible to

Also, the driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation may be set to a larger value than the driving time of one time during the jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, thereby improving the accuracy of operation confirmation. It is possible to

(Modified example of initial operation of various driving sources)
Modified examples of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described below. This modification differs from the above in that the various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, and the setting confirmation mode.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 37, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At timing T1, when a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a turned on, RWM clear switch 111a turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control unit 100 starts a setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (“4” in this case) is displayed on the 7-segment display 113 d at the right end of the information display 113 .

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation are completed, and the main control unit 100 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, the initial operation of various production accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, first image display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control unit 130 is started, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various performance accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various driving sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control unit 100 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done. At this time, the above-described RWM clear preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation are completed, and the main control unit 100 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, the initial operation of various production accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control unit 130 is started, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various performance accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 39, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the second big winning hole 56) (ball entry difficulty) Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At timing T1, when a setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned on) when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control unit 100 starts a setting confirmation mode to start controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (“4” in this case) is displayed on the 7-segment display 113 d at the right end of the information display 113 .

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation are completed, and the main control unit 100 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of special symbols reserved, display of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started, and the power-on notification mentioned above is started. be started. In addition, the initial operation of various production accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, production button 17) controlled by the production control unit 130 is started, and the information display device At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are turned on, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various performance accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 48, and the Initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating member 51, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) Therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (including the replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) ), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is displayed. Information display device 59 (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display 66, and right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that it is possible not to impose an extra processing burden on the main control unit 100, and various drive sources It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the game result is not affected after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is finished. Since the various drive sources for operating the movable body to be given are initially operated, there is no need to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of the various drive sources while changing settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation). , it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed, after the operation standby time has passed, various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are activated. Since the operation is to be started, it is possible to have time to check the operation of various drive sources after the setting change (setting confirmation) is completed, and the operation check can be performed appropriately. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, it is determined whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results is after the setting change mode or after the RWM clear preparation mode. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode has ended, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the game machine 1 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce costs (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the big winning opening LED is extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the big prize opening LED, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 which does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be properly confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 50 and the Since the open signal is not output even though the second big winning hole is open, it is possible to prevent the main control part 100 from being given an extra processing load, and the game machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control unit 100 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, during the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values By not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display the set values and the performance information of the game machine. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement arcade, and to accurately judge failures of various drive sources.

In addition, in this modification, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on after the progress control of the game is started, and the lighting confirmation is performed. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Cycle variation of special symbols)
Next, the cycle variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the cycle variation of special symbols.

As described above, the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs. By changing the lighting pattern of the eight LEDs at predetermined time intervals, the special symbols are variably displayed. In addition, below, although the variable display of the 1st special design is demonstrated, the 2nd special design is also the same.

Specifically, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, all the eight LEDs are off (FIG. 40(a)), the gaming machine 1 is powered on, and the initial state (that is, In the state where the first special symbol is not variably displayed and the special game is not played), the rightmost LED among the eight LEDs is lit, and the other LEDs are extinguished ( FIG. 40(b)). The lighting mode of FIG. 40(b) indicates that the result of the big hit determination is a loss.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first and second LEDs from the left among the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40(c)). This state is maintained for 32 milliseconds from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.

When 32 ms have passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the second and third LEDs from the left among the eight LEDs are lit, and the other LEDs are turned off (Fig. 40 (d )). When 32 ms have passed from the state of FIG. 40(d), the third and fourth LEDs from the left among the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40(e)). ). When 32 milliseconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 40(e), the fourth and fifth LEDs from the left among the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40(f)). ). When 32 ms have passed from the state of FIG. 40(f), the fifth and sixth LEDs from the left among the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40(g). ). When 32 ms have passed from the state of FIG. 40(g), the 6th and 7th LEDs from the left among the 8 LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40(h)). ). When 32 milliseconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 40(h), the 7th and 8th LEDs from the left among the 8 LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40(i)). ). When 32 milliseconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 40(i), the first and eighth LEDs from the left among the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40(j). ). Then, when 32 milliseconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 40(j), the state returns to that of FIG. 40(c). Henceforth, the lighting mode of FIG.40(c)-(j) is repeated until the fluctuation time of a 1st special design passes.

Such LED lighting control is performed in timer interrupt processing by the main control unit 100 which is executed every 4 milliseconds. For example, the main control unit 100 increments the counter by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed, and when the value of the counter becomes a multiple of 8, the LED to be lit is shifted to the right by one. .

In this way, by changing the lighting mode of the LEDs every 32 milliseconds, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Note that the changes in the LEDs shown in FIGS. 40(c) to (j) are called cycle fluctuations. The cycle variation period is 32 ms×8=256 ms. In addition, a change in the lighting state of the LEDs in one cycle variation (for example, a change from a state in which the first and second LEDs are lit to a state in which the second and third LEDs are lit) is referred to as a "unit change There is a thing called. The period of one unit change is 32 ms. Note that the unit change period is not limited to 32 seconds, and may be, for example, 28 milliseconds.

The first special symbol repeats a plurality of cycle variations until the variation time determined based on the result of the jackpot determination elapses. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, each LED lights up in a mode indicating a loss or a big hit based on the result of the big hit determination.

It should be noted that here, in the cycle variation of the special symbol, it is assumed that two LEDs are lit at the same time, but the number of LEDs to be lit during the cycle variation is not limited to this, for example, one LED is lit during the cycle variation , the LED to be turned on may be changed every 32 ms or 28 ms. Also, here, the case where the plurality of LEDs are turned on sequentially from the left in the cycle variation has been described, but the cycle variation may be executed by randomly lighting the plurality of LEDs.

(Image displayed on first image display device 70)
Next, images displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, an effect mode corresponding to the gaming state is set. Specifically, in the normal game state, one of production modes A to C (stages A to C) is set. In addition, the production mode D is set in the variable probability game state, and the production mode E is set in the time saving game state.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the effect mode A set in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 41, a background image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 . The background image is each image displayed on the screen (the effect pattern 701, the small pattern 702, the first pending icon HA, the icon TI, the first number pending SHA, the second number pending SHB, and other images displayed during the variable effect. This is an image that serves as the background of the preview image that will be displayed, etc., and has a lower display priority than each image. The image displayed on the screen is managed by a plurality of layers, and the background image is drawn on the deepest layer (the layer with the lowest display priority). The background image differs depending on the production mode. A normal background image A is displayed in a performance mode A (stage A), a normal background image B is displayed in a performance mode B (stage B), and a normal background image C is displayed in a performance mode C (stage C).

In addition, the background image operates in a predetermined manner in each production mode (this is called "background production"). For example, a character or object included in the background image may move on the screen, or part or all of the background image may move in a predetermined direction or rotate. This background effect may be performed based on the result of the big hit determination or may be performed based on the result of the prior determination, and is performed during the variable display of the special symbols. Also, the background effect may be executed not only during the variable display of the special symbols, but also during the stop display. In this case, it operates regardless of the result of the big hit determination. For example, a background effect may be performed in which a predetermined character moves when a predetermined time comes.

Approximately in the center area of the screen of the first image display device 70, a production design 701 corresponding to the special design is displayed. The effect pattern 701 is displayed superimposed on the background image (preferentially over the background image). The production pattern 701 is composed of three production patterns 701 (each production pattern 701 is called a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern in order from the left). 1 effect pattern 701 is composed of, for example, a number image showing numbers from "1" to "9" and a character image corresponding to the number image. As the production pattern 701, patterns representing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be used. In response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols executed by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, a plurality of performance symbols 701 start the variable display, and stop the variable display of the special symbols. A plurality of production patterns 701 are stop-displayed correspondingly.

The effect pattern 701 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode (losing mode, jackpot mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same performance symbols 701 such as "777" and "555", and the losing mode is other modes.

The display mode of the production pattern 701 differs according to the production mode. For example, in the production mode A, the display mode of the character image included in the production pattern 701 is the first display mode, in the production mode B, the second display mode, and in the production mode C, the third display mode. . In addition, the character included in the production pattern 701 may differ according to the production mode.

Although the details will be described later, the effect pattern 701 performs a start operation effect for a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and after the start operation effect, for example, performs scroll fluctuation in the vertical direction (variation display effect). After performing the scroll variation, the effect pattern 701 performs a pre-stop motion effect, and then stops and displays.

In addition, during the variable production (movement production at the start, scrolling fluctuation, etc.) by the production pattern 701, various production images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. or the second image display device 71, the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game) is heightened.

Also, a small pattern 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The small design 702 is a kind of production design corresponding to the first special design (or the second special design), and is composed of three small designs 701 (left design, middle design, right design). The small pattern 702 is a pattern smaller than the production pattern 701, and is composed of a number image showing numbers from "1" to "9" similar to the production pattern 701, but a character image like the production pattern 701 is included. Not included. The small symbols 702 are variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbols, and are stop-displayed according to the stop-display of the special symbols. The display mode of the small pattern 702 is the same in any of the production modes AC. The display mode of the small symbols 702 may be the same regardless of the game state, or may be different depending on the game state.

Also, a first pending icon display area 703A is provided in the lower area on the left side of the screen. In the first pending icon display area 703A, the number of first pending icons HA corresponding to the first pending number (U1) of the first special symbol is displayed. The first pending icon display area 703A is divided into four areas. The first reserved icon display area 703A includes a first area for displaying the rightmost first reserved icon HA1, a second area for displaying the second first reserved icon HA2 from the right, and a second area for displaying the second reserved icon HA2 from the right. It is composed of a third area for displaying the second first pending icon HA3 and a fourth area for displaying the fourth first pending icon HA4 from the right.

An icon display area 704 is provided on the right side of the first pending icon display area 703A. The icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 704 while the special symbol is changing. The icon TI has the same display mode (similar shape) as the first pending icon HA, but the icon TI is a larger image than the first pending icon HA.

Each first suspension icon HA is an image indicating suspension of the right of variable display of the first special symbol (jackpot determination based on winning to the first starting port 45). The icon TI is an image showing the current variation of the special symbol (also referred to as "the variation"). The first pending icons HA are consumed in order from the side closer to the icon display area 704 . Specifically, when the current special symbol is changed, the first suspended icon HA1 displayed in the first area of the first suspended icon display area 703A moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. be done. Simultaneously with the movement of the first pending icon HA1 to the icon display area 704, the first pending icons HA2-HA4 are shifted one area to the right and displayed as the first pending icons HA1-HA3.

The first pending icon HA and the icon TI are displayed in different display modes depending on the rendering mode. For example, in the presentation mode A, diamond-shaped images are displayed as the first pending icon HA and the icon TI. Also, in the effect mode B, fan-shaped images are displayed as the first pending icon HA and the icon TI. Further, in the effect mode C, rectangular images are displayed as the first pending icon HA and the icon TI.

Also, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI operate in a predetermined display manner during the variable display and stop display of the special symbols. Specifically, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI operate at regular intervals. Hereinafter, the action of the first pending icon HA or the icon TI may be referred to as "periodic action". The first pending icon HA and the icon TI perform periodic actions in the same or substantially the same manner. The aspect of periodic operation differs according to the production mode.

For example, in the production mode A, the diamond-shaped first reserved icon HA and the diamond-shaped icon TI are tilted rightward by 25 degrees from the first state tilted leftward by 25 degrees during variable display and stop display of the special symbols. The first periodic operation is repeated in which the state is shifted to the second state over 1 second and then returned to the first state over 1 second. That is, in the effect mode A, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI perform the first cyclic action in a 2-second cycle. Also, in the effect mode B, the fan-shaped first pending icon HA and the icon TI perform a second periodic action different from the first periodic action while the special symbols are being variably displayed and stopped. For example, the fan-shaped first hold icon HA and the icon TI repeat the expansion state and the contraction state at a constant cycle (same or different cycle as when set to the production mode A) as the second periodic operation. Further, in the production mode C, the rectangular first pending icon HA and the icon TI perform a third periodic action (for example, rotating action) at a constant cycle (same or different cycle as in the case of the production mode A). conduct.

In addition, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI can be changed from a normal mode (white) to a special mode (blue, red, gold, rainbow color) different from the normal mode in any of the presentation modes A to C. be. The special mode indicates that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than that of the normal mode, and indicates that the degree of expectation is higher in the order of blue, red, gold, and rainbow colors. The first pending icon HA and the icon TI perform periodic actions in the same manner regardless of whether they are displayed in the normal mode or in the special mode. It should be noted that the mode of periodic action of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI may be different between when they are displayed in the special mode and when they are displayed in the normal mode. Also, the mode of periodic action of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI may differ depending on whether the special modes are blue, red, gold, or rainbow. For example, when the icon is blue, the icon performs periodic motion in the first mode, and when the icon is red, the icon moves in the second mode with greater movement (or faster motion speed) than in the first mode. may perform periodic operation. Further, there may be a change suggesting mode (for example, blinking mode) that suggests the possibility that the first pending icon HA or the icon TI will change to a special mode. When the first pending icon HA or the icon TI is displayed in the change suggesting mode, the same periodic action as in the normal mode may be performed, or a different periodic action may be performed. Further, when the first pending icon HA or the icon TI is displayed in the change suggesting mode, the same periodic action as in the special mode may be performed, or a different periodic action may be performed.

In addition, in the lower right area of the screen, a first number pending SHA representing the first pending number (U1) indicating the pending number of variable display of the first special symbol and a pending number of variable display of the second special symbol are displayed. A second number pending SHB is displayed, which is a number indicating a second pending number (U2). The display modes of the first number pending SHA and the second number pending SHB are the same in any production mode, and are the same in any game state.

Note that the icon display area 704 is formed on a predetermined pedestal image. A first pending icon display area 703 may also be formed on a predetermined pedestal image.

In addition, in the normal game state, basically the game ball does not enter the second start port 47, but when the game ball enters the second start port 47, an area different from the first reserved icon display area 703A (For example, in the area on the right side of the icon display area 704), a second suspension icon HB indicating suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol (jackpot determination based on the winning of the second starting port 47) is displayed. A maximum of four second pending icons HB are displayed according to the second pending number (U2).

Further, in the present embodiment, the first image display device 70 performs a variable display of the effect pattern 701, but either one or both of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display the effect pattern 701. may be displayed. Alternatively, the first image display device 70 may variably display the effect symbol 701 , and the second image display device 71 may variably display the small symbol 702 . In addition, the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 are variably displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first pending icon HA, the second pending icon HB, and the pending icon TI are displayed on the second image display device 71. may

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the effect mode D set in the variable probability gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the variable probability gaming state, the effect mode D is set, and the background image for the effect mode D (variable probability background image) is displayed. Further, as the production pattern 701, the production pattern 701 of a mode different from the production pattern in the normal game state is displayed. Specifically, the production pattern 701 in the variable probability gaming state includes number images indicating numbers from "1" to "9" and does not include character images.

Also, a small pattern 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The display mode and display position of the small symbols 702 in the production mode D (variable probability game state) are the same as in the production modes A to C (normal game state). In the normal gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, the display mode and the display position of the small symbol 702 may be different, the display mode may be the same and the display position may be different, or the display position is the same and the display mode may be different. can be different.

In addition, in the production mode D, a second reserved icon display area 703B for displaying the number of second reserved icons HB corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) of the second special symbol is provided in the lower area on the right side of the screen. be provided. An icon display area 704 for displaying the icon TI is provided on the left side of the second reserved icon display area 703B.

The second reserve icon HB is an image indicating the reserve of the right of variable display of the second special symbol (jackpot determination based on the winning to the second starting port 47), and a maximum of four (HB1 to HB4) are displayed. . The second suspended icon HB is digested in order from the side closer to the icon display area 704 in the same manner as the first suspended icon HA. Specifically, when the change of the current special symbol ends, the leftmost second pending icon HB1 moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. Simultaneously with the movement of the second pending icon HB1 to the icon display area 704, the second pending icons HB2-4 are shifted leftward and displayed as the second pending icons HB1-3.

Also, the first number pending SHA and the second number pending SHB are displayed in the lower right area of the screen. The display mode and display position of the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB are the same as in the normal game state. In addition, the display mode and/or the display position of the first number reservation SHA and the second number reservation SHB may be different between the normal game state and the variable probability game state.

In addition, although illustration is omitted, the production mode E is set in the time-saving game state. In the effect mode E, the background image is different from when the variable probability game state, but the effect pattern 701, the small pattern 702, the second reserved icon HB, the icon TI, the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB are It is the same as in the game state. It should be noted that the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, the display mode and / or the display position of any of these may be different. For example, the display mode and/or the display position of the production pattern 701 may be different between the time saving game state and the variable probability game state, and the display mode and the display position of the small pattern 702 may be the same.

(Production associated with variable display of special symbols)
Next, the effect associated with the variable display of special symbols will be described. FIGS. 43 and 44 are timing charts showing an example of an effect from the start of variation of the first special symbol to the stop when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination in the normal game state. FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will explain the effect in the case where the normal losing variation is performed in the normal game state. 45 to 49 are diagrams showing examples of effects at the respective timings in FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 43, before time t0, the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 (and the second special symbol display device 61), and the first special symbol reservation display device 63 indicates The first reservation number U1 (and the second reservation number U2 indicated by the second special symbol reservation display 64) is zero (FIG. 45(a)). Specifically, in the first special symbol display device 60, only the rightmost LED among the eight LEDs is lit, and a failure is reported. Also, the two LEDs of the first special symbol holding display 63 are turned off. Moreover, the LED of the first sub variable display 81 is off, and the two LEDs of the first sub holding display 83 are also off. In addition, in the first image display device 70, the customer waiting effect is not performed, and the effect pattern 701 and the small pattern 702 are displayed in a stopped state (for example, "144") which is superimposed on the normal background image and indicates a failure. It is Also, the first pending icon HA and the corresponding icon TI are not displayed, and the first numeric pending SHA and the second numeric pending SHB are "0". Also, BGM is not output from the speaker. In addition, a background effect is performed in which a normal background image moves in a predetermined manner.

At time t0, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 45, a jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol is performed, and the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45(b), until 32 milliseconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, one of the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display 60 from the left The second and second LEDs are lit, and the other LEDs are extinguished. After time t0, the first special symbol repeats the cycle variation described above until the variation time of the special symbol set by the variation pattern setting process elapses. Further, at time t0, the LED of the first sub-variation display 81 remains unlit, and the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 remain stopped and displayed. Also, the BGM remains non-output. On the other hand, the background production continues.

Next, at time t1, the production control section 130 receives a variation start command from the main control section 100, and production is started in response to the reception of this variation start command (FIG. 45(c)). Concretely, by the time the first cycle variation of the first special symbol is finished, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is started. Also, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display (flashing display) of the first sub variable display 81 are started. Also, an additional icon display effect is performed in which the first pending icon HA1 is additionally displayed. In addition, output of normal BGM from the speaker is started. The type of normal BGM differs depending on the production mode. At the start of the fluctuation of the performance pattern 701, there is a case where a performance sound suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win is output based on the result of the determination of the big win. Also, the background effect is performed at the time t1, and the background effect is continued thereafter.

More specifically, in the starting motion effect using the effect pattern 701, the effect pattern 701 operates in a predetermined manner. For example, as each production pattern 701 starts to move upward on the screen, the character image in the production pattern 701 moves. This start action presentation is performed over a predetermined period of time (eg, 30-45 frame times; 1-1.5 seconds), and is performed over a plurality of cycle variations of special symbols. Specifically, the image sound control unit 140 stores an animation moving image (data indicating an operation pattern at the start of fluctuation) composed of a plurality of frames for operating the effect pattern 701 in a predetermined operation pattern. By playing back the animation video, the action effect at the start is performed. In FIG. 45(c), an image at the moment when each effect pattern 701 starts to move is displayed.

There are a plurality of aspects of the action effect at the start, and an animation video corresponding to each aspect (data indicating the action pattern at the start of variation) is stored in advance in the gaming machine 1 (specifically, the image sound control unit 140). there is For example, as a plurality of aspects of the motion effect at the start, there is a mode in which one effect pattern 701 is moved upward by a predetermined distance, then temporarily stopped, and then moved downward while being accelerated. The execution time (rendering time) may be different or the same depending on each aspect of the start-time action rendering. In addition, examples of a plurality of aspects of the action presentation at the start will be described later.

There is a case where the left, middle and right three production patterns 701 perform the action production at the start in the same manner, and there is a case where the three production patterns 701 on the left, the middle and the right carry out the operation production at the start in different forms. There may be In addition, the three production patterns 701 may perform the start-time action effects at the same timing, or may perform the start-time action effects at different timings. Here, an effect example is shown in which the three effect patterns 701 perform the action effect at the start at the same timing.

It should be noted that the aspect of the start operation effect using the effect pattern 701 may differ depending on the type of the effect pattern 701 (any one of "1" to "9"), may differ depending on the effect mode, and may be a big hit. It may differ depending on the degree of expectation (fluctuation pattern of special symbols). Also, the mode of the action presentation at the start may suggest the content of the presentation to be performed thereafter. For example, a particular aspect of the start action effect may indicate that the ready-to-win effect is likely to follow.

In the start action effect using the effect pattern 701, unlike the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 described later, the character images and numbers in the effect pattern 701 are displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to visually recognize. Specifically, in the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701, the effect pattern 701 is translucent and displayed moving at high speed, so that the player can select any number from "1" to "9". It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern 701 is currently displayed. On the other hand, in the start action effect using the effect pattern 701, the effect pattern 701 is displayed in a normal non-translucent manner and is not displayed by moving at high speed. , which number of the effect pattern 701 is operating can be easily recognized.

The variable display effect using the small patterns 702 is a effect in which three small patterns, left, middle and right, are displayed by scrolling from top to bottom. In each of the left, middle, and right columns, the small symbols "1" to "9" are repeatedly displayed with high speed fluctuations at a predetermined cycle. The predetermined cycle of this small pattern is different from the cycle of the periodic actions of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI. The predetermined cycle of the small symbols may be shorter or longer than the cycles of the periodic actions of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI. During the variable display presentation of the small symbols 704, the small symbols are displayed semi-transparently and move at high speed, making it difficult for the player to recognize the numbers of the small symbols. At the timing when the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 is started, the small pattern 702 shifts from the stopped display state to the scroll display state (high-speed fluctuation state) as shown in FIG. 45(c). .

Further, at time t1, an additional icon display effect for additionally displaying the first pending icon HA1 is started. The icon addition display effect is an animation moving image performed over a plurality of frame times (for example, 10 frame times; 1/3 second) shorter than the action effect at the start. There are a plurality of aspects of the icon addition display effect. For example, in the first aspect of the additional icon display effect, the first pending icon HA1 with a transparency of 50% is displayed at the start of display, and the transparency decreases as time passes, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 frames) ), the first pending icon HA1 with 0% transparency (that is, the normal first pending icon HA1) is displayed. In addition, in the second aspect of the icon addition display effect, a relatively small first pending icon HA1 is displayed at the start of display, enlarged as time passes, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 frames), the normal icon is displayed. A first pending icon HA1 having a size of . Which aspect of the plurality of aspects to execute the icon addition display effect may be determined according to the effect mode, or may be determined by lottery. Note that during the icon addition display effect, the icons may move in a predetermined motion mode different from the periodic motion described above. For example, when the first reserved icon HA1 appears while rotating, an additional display effect of the first reserved icon HA1 is performed. A periodic motion that oscillates periodically may be performed.

In addition, along with the icon addition display effect, a winning sound may be output according to the winning of the game ball into the starting hole. The winning sound may be output according to the result of the big win determination or the preliminary determination, and the winning sound may suggest the degree of expectation for the big win.

Further, at time t1, the variable display (blinking display of the LED) using the first sub variable display 81 is started. The hatched circles in FIG. 45(c) represent the blinking display of the LED. The period of blinking display of the first sub-variable display 81 is shorter than the period of periodic operation of the first hold icon HA. Also, at time t1, the left LED of the first sub-hold indicator 83 lights up. Further, the value indicated by the first digit reserved SHA remains "0", and the value indicated by the second digit reserved SHB also remains "0".

Next, at time t2 (for example, during the second cycle change of the first special symbol), the additional display animation of the first reserved icon HA1 ends, and the additional display of the first reserved icon HA1 is completed. An icon movement display effect is started in which the displayed first suspended icon HA1 moves from the first area of the first suspended icon display area 703A to the icon display area 704 (FIG. 45(d)). The icon movement display effect is an animation moving image performed over a plurality of frame times (for example, 15 frame times; 0.5 seconds).

It should be noted that there are a plurality of aspects of the icon movement display effect. Specifically, the aspect of the icon movement display effect is determined according to the effect mode. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the aspect of the icon movement display effect. For example, when a specific first reserved icon HA performs an icon movement display effect in a specific manner, even if there is a high possibility of winning big in the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the specific first reserved icon HA. good. Further, when the plurality of first reserved icons HA perform the icon movement display effect in a specific manner, the big win is achieved in the variation of the special symbol corresponding to any one of the plurality of first reserved icons HA. It may be shown that there is a high probability that

In addition, at time t2, the starting motion effect using the effect pattern 701 is continued, each effect pattern 701 is moved upward from time t1, and the character image in the effect pattern 701 moves further. In addition, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display (blinking display of the LED) using the sub-first variable display 81 are also continued. On the other hand, at time t2, the left LED of the first sub-suspension display 83 is extinguished. That is, the left LED of the sub-first suspension display 83 lights up when the first suspension icon HA1 starts to be displayed, and goes out when the first suspension icon HA1 starts to move to the icon TI. Note that the left LED of the sub-first suspension display 83 may be illuminated until the first suspension icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI (time t1 to t3).

At times t2 to t3, as shown in FIG. 45(e), the effect pattern 701 moves further upward. In addition, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 are continued. In addition, the icon movement display effect is continuously performed, and a state in which the first pending icon HA1 becomes translucent and moves is displayed.

Next, at time t3, the icon movement display effect ends, and the movement of the first pending icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 ends (FIG. 45(f)). As a result, the first pending icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the icon TI is displayed larger than the first pending icon HA1. Specifically, the first pending icon HA1 is gradually enlarged as it moves toward the icon display area 704, and when it is displayed in the icon display area 704, it is displayed in the size of the icon TI. . At time t3, the starting operation effect using the effect pattern 701 continues, and the effect pattern 701 moves further upward. In addition, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 are also continued.

Here, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 704 performs a predetermined cyclic action at a constant cycle (for example, a 2-second cycle). Specifically, animation (for example, animation consisting of 60 frames) data for the periodic motion of the icon TI is stored in the gaming machine 1, and this animation is repeatedly reproduced while the icon TI is being displayed. be. That is, when the last frame of the animation for the periodic motion of the icon TI is displayed, the display starts again from the first frame (top). Similarly, animation data for the periodic motion of the hold icon HA is stored in the gaming machine 1 in advance. In this embodiment, the periodic action of the icon TI and the periodic action of the pending icon HA are the same action. When one or a plurality of first pending icons HA and the icon TI are displayed at the same time, these icons (the plurality of first pending icons HA and the icon TI) synchronously perform periodic actions.

The animation data for the periodic movement of the icon TI and the animation data for the periodic movement of the hold icon HA may be the same data or different data. Moreover, the mode of the periodic operation differs depending on the set production mode.

Note that while the first pending icon HA1 is being moved and displayed (time t2 to t3), the first pending icon HA1 performs the same periodic action. Also, the first pending icon HA1 performs the same cyclical operation at the time when it is additionally displayed (time t1 to t2). It should be noted that the first pending icon HA does not have to perform a predetermined periodic action while it is being moved and displayed (while the icon moving display effect is being executed). That is, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the first pending icon HA may temporarily stop the periodic action. In this case, the first pending icon HA starts the periodic action from the beginning (from the first state) after being moved to the right area by the icon movement display effect. Further, while the first pending icon HA is additionally displayed (during execution of the icon addition display effect), the additionally displayed first pending icon HA does not need to perform the periodic operation.

At times t3 to t4, as shown in FIG. 46(g), the starting action effect of the effect symbol 701 is continuously executed. Specifically, the production pattern 701 reverses from upward movement and gradually accelerates downward. In addition, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 are continued. Further, the icon TI continues to perform a predetermined periodic action.

Next, at time t4, the start action effect of the effect pattern 701 ends, and the variable display effect using the three effect patterns 701 is started (FIG. 46(h)). In the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701, the effect pattern 701 is displayed semi-transparently and scroll-displayed at high speed. Specifically, in each of the left region, the middle region, and the right region, a pattern row in which a plurality of production patterns 701 including numbers "1" to "9" are arranged in the vertical direction moves downward at high speed. displayed moving. The image sound control unit 140 stores an animation moving image (data indicating the movement pattern during the variable display) for the variable display effect (scroll display) of the effect pattern 701, and reproduces the animation corresponding to the motion effect at the start. When is finished, the animation for the variable display effect is started to be reproduced. In addition, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 are continued. Further, the icon TI continues to perform a predetermined periodic action.

There are a plurality of aspects of the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701, and an animation moving image (data indicating the operation pattern during the variable display) corresponding to each aspect is stored in advance. For example, as a plurality of modes of variable display effect, there is a mode in which a plurality of types of effect patterns 701 ("1" to "9" effect patterns) arranged in the vertical direction are moved and displayed from above to below at high speed. In addition, examples of a plurality of aspects of the variable display effect of the effect pattern 701 will be described later.

On the other hand, there is only one aspect of the variable display effect using the small symbols 702 . In the variable display effect using the small patterns 702, in each of the left, middle, and right areas, a pattern row in which the small patterns 702 of "1" to "9" are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed moving downward at high speed. be. Also, there is only one mode of variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 . In the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81, the LED blinks at predetermined time intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals).

The variable display performance using the small pattern 702 may have a plurality of modes, and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 may have a plurality of modes. In this case, the number of variable display effects using the effect symbol 701 is greater than the number of variable display effects using the small symbols 702 and the number of variable display modes using the sub first variable display 81 .

The left, middle, and right three production patterns 701 perform the variable display production in the same manner. note that. There may be a case where the left, middle, and right three production patterns 701 perform the variable display production in different modes.

Further, the aspect of the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 may differ depending on the type of the effect pattern 701 (any one of "1" to "9"), may differ depending on the effect mode, and may differ depending on the effect mode. It may differ depending on the degree (variation pattern of special symbols).

At the time t5, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, the left LED lights up among the two LEDs of the first special symbol holding display 63 (Fig. 46(i)). As a result, it is informed that the first reservation number U1 has become "1" (that is, one right of the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol has been reserved). Even at time t5, the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701, the variable display effect using the small symbol 702, and the variable display using the first sub-variable display device 81 are continued. Further, the icon TI continues to perform a predetermined periodic action.

Next, at time t6, in response to the effect control unit 130 receiving the start winning command from the main control unit 100, the LED on the left side of the sub first suspension display 83 is lit, and the first number suspension SHA is displayed. It increases from "0" to "1" (FIG. 46(j)). The incrementing of the first digit reserved SHA from '0' to '1' is done in one frame time. That is, the first number pending SHA is updated from "0" to "1" at the next frame update timing after the effect control unit 130 receives the start winning command.

Further, at time t6, the icon addition display effect of the first pending icon HA1 is started. As a result, an additional display animation of the first pending icon HA1 is displayed, and a state in which the first pending icon HA1 is additionally displayed (eg, half A change from a transparent mode to a normal non-translucent mode) is displayed. Note that a winning sound may be output along with this icon addition display effect.

At times t6 to t7, the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701, the variable display effect using the small symbol 702, and the variable display using the first sub-variable display device 81 are continued. Also, the first pending icon HA1 is continuously displayed after being additionally displayed by the icon addition display effect. Also, the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI perform a predetermined periodic action in synchronization (FIG. 46(k)).

Here, while the icon TI is performing a predetermined periodic motion, the game ball can win the first starting port 45 at any timing. Even if the first pending icon HA1 is additionally displayed at any timing while the icon TI is performing the predetermined periodic action, the first pending icon HA1 after the additional display is synchronized with the icon TI and performs the predetermined Cycle operation. That is, when the icon TI is in the first state, the first pending icon HA1 is also in the first state, and when the icon TI is in the second state, the first pending icon HA1 is also in the second state. The same applies when the first pending icons HA2 to HA4 are additionally displayed. In other words, each of the first pending icons HA and the icon TI perform periodic actions synchronously regardless of the timing at which they are additionally displayed. In other words, regardless of the timing at which the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, each first pending icon HA and the icon TI perform periodic operations in synchronization.

Any method may be used to synchronize the first pending icon HA and the icon TI. For example, when the icon TI is tilted to the right by 25 degrees due to a predetermined periodic motion, when the icon additional display effect of the first pending icon HA1 is started (FIG. 46(j)), the first pending icon HA1 At the start of the additional display of , the first pending icon HA1 may be displayed tilted 25 degrees to the right. Specifically, when the additional display of the first pending icon HA1 is started, it is determined which frame of the animation for the periodic action of the icon TI is being displayed, and the periodic action of the first pending icon HA1 is determined. start playing the animation for from the same frame. Thereafter, by displaying the two animations frame by frame at frame update timing, the icon TI and the first pending icon HA1 synchronize and perform a predetermined periodic motion. Even during the additional display of the first pending icon HA1, the first pending icon HA1 performs periodic actions in synchronization with the icon TI. The animation for the additional icon display effect may be part of the animation for the periodic action of the first pending icon HA1.

Further, after the additional display of the first pending icon HA1 is completed by the additional icon display effect, the periodic action of the first pending icon HA1 may be started in synchronization with the periodic action of the icon TI. In this case, during the icon addition display presentation of the first pending icon HA1, the first pending icon HA1 may not perform the periodic action, or may perform the periodic action without synchronizing with the icon TI. . For example, when the additional display of the first pending icon HA1 is completed by the icon additional display effect, it is determined what frame of the animation for the periodic action of the icon TI is being displayed, and the first pending icon HA1 is displayed. Playback of the animation for the periodic motion may start from the same frame. After that, by reproducing the two animations according to the passage of time, the icon TI and the first pending icon HA1 are synchronized and perform a predetermined periodic action.

Further, after the additional display of the first suspended icon HA1 is completed by the icon addition display effect, the first suspended icon HA1 is made to perform the periodic action until the last frame of the animation for the periodic action of the icon TI is displayed. Instead, the animation for the periodic action of the first on-hold icon HA1 may start playing from the beginning when the animation for the periodic action of the icon TI is played from the beginning. As a result, the icon TI and the first pending icon HA1 synchronously perform a predetermined periodic action thereafter.

Next, at time t7, for example, the left performance design 701 (left design) among the three performance designs 701 starts the pre-stop action performance (FIG. 46(l)). At this point, the right pattern and the middle pattern are continuing the variable display effect. In addition, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 are also continued. Specifically, all the three small patterns 702 continue the variable display effect. Also, the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to perform predetermined periodic actions in synchronization (FIG. 46(l)).

Here, the pre-stop action effect is after the variable display effect (scroll display) of the effect pattern 701 is performed, and before the stop display (temporary stop or permanent stop) of the effect pattern 701, the effect pattern 701 is an effect to operate in a predetermined mode. In the pre-stop action effect, the effect pattern 701 is displayed in a normal non-translucent manner, and moves slowly from top to bottom of the screen, for example. Also, the character image in the effect pattern 701 moves in a predetermined manner. Since the production pattern 701 is displayed in a normal non-translucent manner and moves at a relatively slow speed, the player can perform the pre-stop motion production for any of the production patterns 701 from '1' to '9'. It is easy to recognize whether In addition, since the character image in the effect pattern 701 moves, the interest is improved.

It should be noted that the "temporary stop" of the production pattern 701 is a state in which the production pattern 701 is slightly fluctuating, for example, slightly shaking (swinging) in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, or being slightly deformed, and the production pattern 701 is not completely stopped. On the other hand, the "final stop" of the production pattern 701 is a state in which the production pattern 701 is completely stopped.

There are a plurality of aspects of the pre-stop motion presentation using the presentation pattern 701, and an animation moving image (data indicating the motion pattern before the fluctuation stop) corresponding to each aspect is stored in advance. For example, there is a mode in which the character waves its hand while the production pattern 701 slowly moves from top to bottom and stops at a predetermined position. Depending on each aspect, the execution time (rendering time) may be different or the same.

There is a case where the left, middle, and right three production patterns 701 perform the pre-stop motion production in the same mode, and there is a case where the left, middle, and right three production patterns 701 perform the pre-stop motion production in different modes, respectively. There is also In addition, if the three production patterns 701 perform the pre-stop motion effects at the same timing, they may perform the pre-stop motion effects at different timings. Here, an effect example is shown in which the three effect patterns 701 perform the pre-stop action effect at different timings.

It should be noted that the mode of the pre-stop action effect may differ depending on the type of the effect symbol 701, may differ depending on the effect mode, or may differ according to the degree of expectation of the big hit (fluctuation pattern of the special symbol).

Here, the combination of the action effect at the start using the effect pattern 701, the variable display effect, and the action effect before stopping is determined according to pattern data stored in advance. For example, in the variable effect based on the first pattern data, after the start action effect of the first mode is performed, the variable display effect of the first mode is performed, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the first mode of effect is performed. A pre-stop action effect is performed. Pattern data defining the flow of such a series of effects is stored in advance. For this reason, for example, after the start action effect of the first mode, the variable display effect of the first mode or the second mode is performed, but the variable display effect of the third mode is not performed. It's becoming The same applies to the relationship between the variable display effect and the pre-stop action effect. That is, after the variable display effect of the first mode, the pre-stop motion effect of the first mode or the second mode is performed, but the pre-stop motion effect of the third mode is not performed. there is An example of a series of start time action effects, variable display effects, and pre-stop action effects using the effect pattern 701 will be described later.

Thus, by pre-storing the pattern data storing the combination of the action effect at the start using the effect pattern 701, the variable display effect, and the action effect before stopping, the action effect at the start using the effect pattern 701 and the variable display are stored in advance. The production and the pre-stop action production can be performed in order without a sense of incongruity. Instead of using such pattern data to select the motion effect at the start, the variable display effect, and the motion effect before stopping, for example, a lottery using random numbers can be used to select one of a plurality of modes. You may select an action effect at the start, a variable display effect, or an action effect before stopping. In this case, a combination of specific aspects may be prevented from being selected by prohibition processing. For example, a combination of the first aspect of the starting action effect, the second aspect of the variable display effect, and the third aspect of the before-stop action effect may not be selected by the prohibition process.

Between times t7 and t8, a pre-stop action presentation by the left symbol is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (FIG. 47(m)), and at time t8, the left symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 47(n)). . When the left symbol is temporarily stopped, an effect may be added to the left symbol for a moment (for example, 0.5 seconds) as shown in FIG. 47(n). This effect is an image different from the effect image in the start time effect presentation, and is an image that emphasizes the presentation pattern 701 . During time t7-t8, the right symbol and middle symbol continue the variable display effect, and the variable display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 are also continued. In addition, the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to perform predetermined periodic actions in synchronism.

After that, at the time t9, the pre-stop action effect by the right symbol is started (FIG. 47(o)). The pre-stop motion effect by the right symbol may be the same mode as the pre-stop motion effect by the left symbol, or may be a different mode. While the pre-stop action effect by the right symbol is being executed (time t9-t10), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is performing the variable display effect (FIG. 47(p)). Also, during this time, the variable display effect using the small symbols 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 are continued, and the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue their predetermined periodic operations.

Then, at time t10, the right symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 47(q)). Incidentally, when the right symbol is temporarily stopped, an effect may be added to the right symbol for a moment in the same manner as when the left symbol is temporarily stopped. Even at time t10, the medium symbols continue the variable display effect, and the variable display effect using the small symbols 702 and the variable display using the first sub variable display 81 are also continued. Also, the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to perform predetermined periodic actions.

Next, at time t11, a pre-stop motion effect using medium symbols is started (FIG. 47(r)). The pre-stop motion effect by the middle symbol may be the same aspect as the pre-stop motion effect by the left symbol and the right symbol, or may be different. While the pre-stop action effect by the middle symbol is being executed (time t11 to t12), the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped (FIG. 48(s)). Further, during this time, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 are continued, and the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue the predetermined periodic operation. .

Then, at time t12, the middle symbols are temporarily stopped, and the three performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 48(t)). In addition, when the middle pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect may be added to the middle pattern only for a moment. Also, when each of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern is temporarily stopped, the effect is not added, and when the three production patterns 701 are temporarily stopped (that is, the third production pattern 701 is temporarily stopped ), an effect may be added to each of the three production patterns 701 . At time t12, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the first sub variable display 81 are also continued. Also, the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to perform predetermined periodic actions.

At time t13 after a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) has elapsed since the three production symbols 701 temporarily stopped, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in the form of a failure (FIG. 48 ( u)). At time t13, the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 701, the variable display performance using the small symbols 702, and the variable display using the first variable display device 81 are continued. In addition, the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI also continue their predetermined periodic actions.

Next, at time t14, in response to the fact that the production control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 100, the three production patterns 701 are actually stopped, and the small patterns 702 are stopped and displayed (FIG. 48). (v)). That is, the three small patterns 702 are stopped and displayed without going through the motion effect at stop like the effect pattern 701 from the state in which the variable display (high-speed fluctuation) is being performed. Further, when the LED of the first sub-variation display 81 is turned off, stop display using the first sub-variation display 81 is performed.

At the timing when the main stop of the three production patterns 701, the stop display of the small pattern 702, and the stop display of the sub first variable display 81 are performed (or after these stop displays), the icon TI is displayed. An extinction effect is started. Here, the disappearing effect of the icon TI is an animation performed over a plurality of frames (for example, 10 frames), and is a effect in which the icon TI gradually disappears. In this vanishing effect, for example, the transparency of the icon TI gradually increases, and the icon TI vanishes (erased) (that is, is hidden) after a predetermined time (for example, 0.4 seconds) has elapsed. As another aspect of the effect of disappearing the icon TI, the size of the icon TI may be gradually reduced, and the icon TI may disappear after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Next, at time t15, the disappearing effect of the icon TI ends, and the icon TI disappears completely (FIG. 48(w)). During this time t14-t15 as well, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the icon TI and the first pending icon HA continue to operate periodically even during execution of the disappearing effect of the icon TI. Further, even when the disappearing effect of the icon TI ends, the first pending icon HA continues the periodic action. Note that, during execution of the disappearing effect of the icon TI, the periodic motions of the icon TI and the first pending icon HA may be temporarily stopped (animation terminated). That is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the icon TI and the first pending icon HA may temporarily stop the periodic action. After the icon TI disappears, the first suspended icon HA may temporarily stop the periodic action, or after the icon TI and the first suspended icon HA once stop the periodic action, the icon TI may disappear. good too.

Then, at time t16 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot determination relating to the reserved first special symbol is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed. In the device 60, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the big hit determination is started (FIG. 48(x)). Also, of the two LEDs of the first special symbol holding display 63, the left LED is extinguished.

Between time 14 and t16, the main stop of the three production symbols 701, the stop display of the small symbols 702, and the stop display of the first sub-variation display 81 are continued. Also, the first pending icon HA1 continues a predetermined periodic action. In addition, during this time, the background production continues. Also, normal BGM is continuously output. It should be noted that while the disappearing effect of the icon TI is being performed, the icon TI may continue to perform the predetermined periodic motion, or may not perform the predetermined periodic motion.

Next, at time t17, the production control section 130 receives the variation start command from the main control section 100, and each production is started in the same manner as described above (FIG. 49(y)). Specifically, by the time the first cycle variation of the first special symbol is completed, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 and the variable display effect using the small symbol 702 are started. Also, the icon movement display effect of the first pending icon HA1 is started. In addition, the left LED of the two LEDs of the first sub display 83 is extinguished, and the first number pending SHA decreases from "1" to "0". The decrementation of the first digit reserved SHA from '1' to '0' is done in one frame time. That is, the first number pending SHA is updated from "1" to "0" at the next frame update timing after the effect control unit 130 receives the variation start command. Also at time t17, the background effect is continued. Also, normal BGM is continuously output.

Then, similarly to the above, at time t18, the movement of the first suspended icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 ends, and the first suspended icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 49(z)). Next, at time t19, the starting action effect using the effect pattern 701 ends, and the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 is started (FIG. 49 (z2)). In addition, when temporarily stopping the periodic operation of the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI according to the stop of the special symbol, after shifting the first reserved icon HA according to the start of the fluctuation of the next special symbol, The 1-hold icon HA and the icon may be cyclically operated from the beginning. That is, the animation for the periodic motion may start playing from the beginning. Alternatively, when temporarily stopping the periodic operation of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI in response to the stop of the special symbol, after shifting the first pending icon HA according to the start of the next special symbol fluctuation, The 1-suspended icon HA and the periodic action of the icon may be restarted from the state before the suspension.

In FIGS. 45 to 49, three production patterns 701 simultaneously perform the start action production, and after the variable display production, the production pattern 701 performs the pre-stop action production in order of left, right, and middle. bottom. In other productions, the three production patterns 701 may perform the start operation production at different timings. Also, the order in which the three production patterns 701 stop is not limited to this. For example, the three production patterns 701 may perform the pre-stop action production at the same time, and may be temporarily stopped at the same time. Further, for example, the production design 701 may perform the pre-stop action production in order of right, left, and middle, and the production design 701 may temporarily stop in this order. Also, for example, the left and right symbols may simultaneously perform the pre-stop motion presentation, the left and right symbols may temporarily stop first, and then the middle symbols may perform the pre-stop motion presentation and temporarily stop. Further, the order in which the production design 701 performs the pre-stop action production and the order in which the production design 701 performs the temporary stop may be different. For example, when the right symbol starts the pre-stop motion effect after the left symbol starts the pre-stop motion effect, the right symbol may temporarily stop at the same time as the left symbol, or the right symbol may temporarily stop first. may

In addition, in the present embodiment, at least one of the three production patterns 701 performs a pre-stop action production than the first period in which at least one of the three production patterns 701 performs the start operation production. is longer. For example, in the first period, after the three production patterns 701 simultaneously start the start operation production, the start operation production may be ended at the same time, or the three production patterns 701 simultaneously start the start operation production. After that, the start action effect may end at a different timing. Also, in the second period, after the three production patterns 701 start the pre-stop action production at different timings, the pre-stop action production may be terminated at different timings, or the three production patterns 701 may be simultaneously before the stop. After starting the action presentation, the pre-stop action presentation may be terminated at the same time. In any case, the second period of time is longer than the first period of time. Moreover, the period during which the 1 production design 701 performs the pre-stop operation production is longer than the period during which the 1 production design 701 carries out the operation production at the start. Note that the relationship between these periods may be reversed. That is, at least one of the three production patterns 701 performs the action production at the start rather than the second period in which at least one of the three production patterns 701 performs the pre-stop action production. The period may be longer. Further, the period during which one performance symbol 701 performs the action performance at the start may be longer than the period during which the one performance symbol 701 performs the pre-stop motion performance.

Here, a series of examples of a plurality of performance effects using the performance pattern 701, including a series of start time performance effects, a variable display effect, and a pre-stop motion effect, will be described.

- Default variation In the default variation, the performance symbol 701 momentarily floats upward at the start of the special symbol variation, and then moves downward for a start action rendering. After the action effect at the start, a variable display effect is performed in which the translucent effect pattern 701 moves from top to bottom at high speed (vertically scrolls). After that, in the pre-stop action presentation, the presentation pattern 701 changes from a translucent mode to a non-translucent mode while moving downward, and stops with an effect.

・Reverse Vertical Scrolling Fluctuation In the reverse vertical scrolling fluctuation, the performance symbol 701 momentarily sinks downward at the start of the special symbol variation, and then moves upward. After the action effect at the start, a variable display effect is performed in which the translucent effect pattern 701 moves from bottom to top at high speed (reverse vertical scrolling). After that, in the pre-stop action presentation, the presentation pattern 701 changes from a translucent mode to a non-translucent mode while moving upward from the bottom, and stops with an effect.

・Horizontal Rotation Variation In the lateral rotation variation, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the production pattern 701 momentarily turns to the right, reverses to the left, and rotates sideways. After the action effect at the start, a variable display effect is performed in which the translucent effect pattern 701 rotates sideways at high speed on the spot. After that, in the pre-stop action presentation, the presentation pattern 701 changes from a translucent mode to a non-translucent mode while rotating sideways at a relatively low speed, and stops with an effect.

・Expansion fluctuation In the expansion fluctuation, the production design 701 is expanded at the start of the fluctuation of the special design, and the operation production at the start of moving from the top to the bottom while being expanded is performed. After the action effect at the start, a variable display effect is performed in which the translucent effect pattern 701 moves from top to bottom at high speed (vertically scrolls). After that, in the pre-stop action presentation, the enlarged presentation pattern 701 stops with an effect while moving from top to bottom, and returns to its original size.

・Reel variation In the reel variation, reel-shaped images appear in each of the left, middle, and right areas when the effect symbol 701 starts to change the special symbol, and the reel-shaped image starts to rotate. A performance is held. One reel-shaped image includes performance symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". After the action effect at the start, a variable display effect is performed in which reel-shaped images are rotated at high speed in each of the left, middle, and right regions. After that, in the pre-stop action presentation, the three reel-shaped images are stopped with an effect. Three performance symbols are stopped by arranging the performance symbols contained in each reel in a horizontal line and stopping.

A plurality of operation modes ("default variation", "reverse vertical scroll variation", "horizontal rotation variation", "enlargement variation", and "reel variation") of these production patterns 701 may suggest the result of big hit determination. . Specifically, "default variation" is usually selected, and "default variation" does not suggest the result of jackpot determination. When an effect other than the "default change" is performed, the possibility of winning a big win in the change may be higher than when the "default change" is performed. In addition, effects other than "default variation" may be executed based on the result of prior determination. That is, an effect other than "default change" may be performed as the look-ahead effect.

In addition, a plurality of operation modes ("default variation", "reverse vertical scroll variation", "horizontal rotation variation", "enlargement variation", and "reel variation") of these production patterns 701 suggest the result of big hit determination. It doesn't have to be. For example, a plurality of operation modes of the production pattern 701 may be determined according to the production mode. In addition, regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, a production other than "default fluctuation" (for example, reverse vertical scroll fluctuation) is selected with a predetermined probability, and if a production other than "default fluctuation" is selected, multiple The selected effect (reverse vertical scroll variation) may be performed continuously over the variation of the special symbol.

In addition, the timing at which an effect is added to each production pattern 701 in the pre-stop action production may be the same or may be different. For example, when the performance symbols 701 are stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the left symbol performs the pre-stop action rendering and then temporarily stops with an effect, and then the right symbol performs the pre-stop motion presentation. , the game may be temporarily stopped with an effect, and then the medium pattern may be temporarily stopped with an effect after performing a pre-stop action production. In addition, when the respective production patterns 701 are stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the left pattern performs the pre-stop action production and then temporarily stops without any effect, and then the right pattern performs the pre-stop action production. After that, the effect may be added to each of the three production patterns 701 when temporarily stopping without effect, and when the medium pattern performs the pre-stop action production and then temporarily stopping.

Further, in the above effect example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the first reservation number (U1) is "0", when the game ball wins the first start port 45, the sub-first reservation The LED on the left side of the indicator 83 is turned on only for a moment. In another production example, when the special symbol is stopped and the reservation is zero, when the game ball wins the first start port 45, the LED on the left side of the sub first reservation display 83 It may be set so that it is not lit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the performance symbols perform the operation performance at the start in a predetermined manner. After that, the production pattern starts the variable display production. During the execution of the action effect at the start of the effect symbol, the small symbol 702 and the first sub-variable indicator 81 have already started the variable display. Due to the action performance at the start, attention can be drawn to the performance pattern, and the amusement can be enhanced. Since the operation effect at the start is performed before the variable display effect of the effect pattern, it may be difficult for the player to understand whether the variable display of the special symbol has started, but the small symbol 702 and the sub first variable display 81 are displayed first. Since the variable display is started at , the player can easily recognize the start of the variable of the special symbols.

In addition, after performing the operation production at the start of operating in a predetermined mode for the production pattern 701, the variable display production of the production pattern 701 is started, but for the small pattern 702, the operation production at the start of operating in a prescribed display mode. Start the variable display production without performing To make a player easily recognize the start of fluctuation of a special pattern because the small pattern 702 starts the variable display without performing the action performance at the start while the interest is improved by the action performance at the start by the performance pattern 701.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, after performing the operation production at the start of the performance symbols according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the variable display is started, and during the execution of the operation production at the start of the performance symbols, the suspension controlled by the performance control unit 130 is performed. The information (first digit pending SHA, first pending icon HA, sub first pending indicator 83) is reduced. Since the action effect at the start is performed before the variable display effect of the effect pattern, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the suspension has been completed (the change of the special symbol has started) depending on the action effect at the start. Since the amount of suspension information is reduced during the action presentation at the start, the player can easily recognize the termination of suspension (start of fluctuation of special symbols).

In addition, after performing the action performance at the start of the performance symbols according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the variable display is started, and during the execution of the operation performance at the start of the performance symbols, each of the first holding icons HA is shifted. (For example, movement from the first reserved icon HA1 to the icon TI, movement from the first reserved icon HA2 to the first reserved icon HA1, movement from the first reserved icon HA3 to the first reserved icon HA2, etc.) ing. Since the action effect at the start is performed before the variable display effect of the effect pattern, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the suspension has been completed (the change of the special symbol has started) depending on the action effect at the start. Since the first pending icon HA moves first, the player can easily recognize the completion of the pending state (start of fluctuation of special symbols).

In addition, after performing the action performance at the start of the performance symbols according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the variable display is started, and during the execution of the operation performance at the start of the performance symbols, each of the first holding icons HA is shifted. (For example, movement from the first reserved icon HA1 to the icon TI, movement from the first reserved icon HA2 to the first reserved icon HA1, movement from the first reserved icon HA3 to the first reserved icon HA2, etc.) ing. Since the action effect at the start is performed before the variable display effect of the effect pattern, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the suspension has been completed (the change of the special symbol has started) depending on the action effect at the start. Since the movement of the first pending icon HA is completed first, the player can easily recognize the completion of the pending state (start of fluctuation of special symbols).

In addition, after performing the operation effect at the start of the performance symbols according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the variable display is started, and during the execution of the operation performance at the start of the performance symbols, the icon TI of the first reserved icon HA1 is displayed. have started to move to Since the action effect at the start is performed before the variable display effect of the effect pattern, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the suspension has been completed (the change of the special symbol has started) depending on the action effect at the start. Since the movement of the first pending icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 starts first, the player can easily recognize the start of the special symbol fluctuation.

In addition, after performing the operation performance at the start of the performance symbols according to the start of the variation of the special symbols, the variable display is started, and the icon TI is displayed during the execution of the operation performance at the start of the performance symbols. Since the action effect at the start is performed before the variable display effect of the effect pattern, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the suspension has been completed (the change of the special symbol has started) depending on the action effect at the start. Since the icon TI indicating the current variation of the special symbols is displayed first, the player can easily recognize the start of the variation of the special symbols.

In addition, after performing the action effect at the start of the special pattern in response to the start of the fluctuation of the special pattern, the variable display is started, and during the execution of the action effect at the start of the effect pattern and during the execution of the variable display, the first reservation The icon HA periodically operates in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the performance pattern by the operation performance at the start, and the first suspension icon HA is also noticed by operating the first suspension icon HA in a predetermined display mode before the variable display of the performance symbols. It is possible to make it possible to improve interest.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 when there is no suspension of the variation of the special symbol, the first suspension icon HA1 is additionally displayed during the action presentation at the start, and the first suspension icon HA1 is additionally displayed. The first pending icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704 later. By additionally displaying the first pending icon HA1, the player can easily recognize that the change has started due to the winning of a new game ball. Further, the additionally displayed first pending icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon IT, thereby intuitively recognizing that the big win determination corresponding to this icon has been performed. be able to. In addition, along with the additional display of the first suspension icon HA1, the LED on the left side of the sub-first suspension display 83 lights up and goes out, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the fluctuation based on the new winning has started. can.

While the additional display of the first pending icon HA1 and the lighting of the LED on the left side of the sub-first pending display 83 are performed, the value indicated by the first numeric pending SHA remains "0" (FIG. 45(c) )). Due to the additional display of the first pending icon HA1 and the lighting of the LED on the left side of the sub-first pending display 83, the first pending number U1 has increased (that is, the right to determine the jackpot in the main control unit 100). Although it may be misunderstood, displaying the actual first pending number U1 by the first numeric pending SHA can avoid misleading the player.

In addition, in response to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, after performing the operation effect at the start of the performance symbols, the variable display is started, and during the execution of the operation performance at the start of the performance symbols or during the execution of the variable display, the icon TI performs periodic operation in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the effect symbol by the operation effect at the start, and to draw attention to the icon TI by operating the icon TI in a predetermined display mode before the variable display of the effect symbol. , can improve interest.

In addition, after performing the operation performance at the start of the performance symbols according to the start of the variation of the special symbols, the variation display is started, and the output of the BGM is started during the execution of the operation performance at the start. Since the output of BGM is started before the start of the variable display of the performance symbols, the player can be made to recognize the variation of the special symbols. In addition, since the output of the BGM is started before the variable display of the performance symbols is started, the start of the game can be made smoother, and the player can enjoy the game faster than when the variable display of the performance symbols is suddenly started. becomes easier to get into the game.

In addition, after performing the operation performance at the start of the performance symbols according to the start of the variation of the special symbols, the variation display is started, and the BGM can be output when the operation performance at the start is executed. Since the BGM is output when the action performance at the start is executed, the game can be smoothly started, and the player is more likely to get into the game than when the variable display of the performance pattern is suddenly started.

In addition, after performing the action performance at the start of the performance symbols according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the variable display is started, and the BGM output before the performance of the action performance at the start is continued even during the performance of the action at the start. and output. Since the BGM is output before the execution of the action effect at the start, the game can be started smoothly, and the player can enjoy the game more than when the action effect at the start of the effect pattern or the variable display of the effect pattern is suddenly started. Easier to get in.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variable effect by the production design during the variable display of the special design and a variation production by the small design, and during the stop display of the special design, the stop display by the production design and the small design. Stop display and can be executed. After the variable performance (pre-start motion performance and variable display performance) by the performance pattern, the pre-stop motion performance that operates the performance symbols in a predetermined manner is executed, and during the pre-stop motion performance, the fluctuation performance by the small symbols is executed. ing. Before the stop display of the performance pattern, the pre-stop operation performance using the performance pattern is performed, so that the performance pattern can be noticed and the amusement can be enhanced. In addition, although there is a possibility that the player may be confused as to whether the special symbols are fluctuating or stopped due to the pre-stop motion presentation, the special symbols can be changed by executing the variable presentation with the small symbols during the pre-stop motion presentation. The player can be made to recognize that he/she is doing so, and the expectation for the big win can be maintained.

In addition, in the present embodiment, while the performance symbol is performing the pre-stop motion effect in one region (for example, the right region), the performance symbol is the same or different in the other region (middle region). There are times when a variable display effect is performed in another area (middle area). As a result, it is possible to perform pre-stop motion performance by changing the timing for each performance pattern (left, middle and right patterns), or to perform pre-stop motion performance at the same time, thereby improving amusement. For example, if one production pattern (for example, the right pattern) is performing a pre-stop action production and another production pattern (middle pattern) is performing a variable display production, the fluctuation will not end as it is , raising expectations for yet another development.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect symbol during the variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to execute the stop display by the effect symbol during the stop display of the special symbol. After the variable performance (pre-start action performance and variable display performance) by the performance pattern, the pre-stop motion performance for operating the performance pattern in a predetermined mode is executed, and then the performance pattern is stop-displayed. During the pre-stop operation production, the special symbol is executing a variable production. Before the stop display of the performance pattern, the pre-stop operation performance using the performance pattern is performed, so that the performance pattern can be noticed and the amusement can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the effect symbol is stopped after performing the pre-stop action effect, the disappearing effect of the icon is performed after the pre-stop action effect is performed. By performing the pre-stop action presentation using the presentation pattern, attention can be paid to the presentation pattern, and the amusement can be enhanced. When the performance pattern is stopped after the performance pattern is operated by the pre-stop action performance, the timing of stopping may rather be difficult to understand because the state changes from the moving state to the stopped state, but the performance pattern is stopped. By extinguishing the icon after the pre-action presentation, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the variation of the special symbol has ended.

In addition, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the effect symbol is stopped after performing the pre-stop action effect, the icon is displayed during the pre-stop action effect, and the icon disappears after the stop display of the effect symbol. do. By performing the pre-stop action presentation using the presentation pattern, attention can be paid to the presentation pattern, and the amusement can be enhanced. By extinguishing the icon after the stop display of the production pattern, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the variation of the special pattern is finished.

In addition, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the performance symbols and the small symbols are stop-displayed after the performance symbols perform the pre-stop action rendering, the disappearance performance of disappearing the icon is executed after the small symbols are stopped and displayed. . By performing the pre-stop action presentation using the presentation pattern, attention can be paid to the presentation pattern, and the amusement can be enhanced. By erasing the icon after the small symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbols have changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance symbols and the small symbols are stopped and displayed after the performance symbols perform the pre-stop motion effect. As for the small symbols, the small symbols are stopped and displayed without performing the pre-stop action effect of moving the small symbols in a predetermined mode. By performing the pre-stop action presentation using the presentation pattern, attention can be paid to the presentation pattern, and the amusement can be enhanced. Since the small symbols are stopped and displayed without performing the pre-stop action presentation, it is possible to inform the player that the variation of the special symbols has ended in an easy-to-understand manner without being confused.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the performance symbols perform the pre-stop motion rendering, the BGM is continuously output both during the pre-stop motion rendering of the performance symbols and during the stop display of the performance symbols. . For this reason, it is possible to ensure the continuity of the presentation, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the next variation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of operation modes for the start-time action effect using the effect symbols, and the start-time action effect is performed in any one of the plurality of action modes. Regardless of which action mode the action effect at the start is performed, the variable display using the small pattern 702 or the first sub-variable indicator 81 is started first. In addition, depending on the operation mode of the start time operation production using the production design, the time until the production design performs the variable display production is different. In addition, even if the action presentation at the start is performed in any action mode, the mode of the variable display of the small pattern 702 and the first sub-variation display 81 is the same.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of operation modes for the start operation effect using the effect symbols, and in any operation mode, the left, middle, and right three effect symbols are used to perform the start operation effect. Patterns with the same order of execution exist. For example, there is a pattern in which three performance symbols simultaneously start the start-time action effect regardless of the operation mode of the start-time action effect. Also, in any operation mode, there is a pattern in which the start-time operation effect is started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of operation modes for the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbols, and in any of the motion modes, the left, middle, and right three effect symbols are used to perform the pre-stop motion effect. Patterns with the same order of execution exist. For example, there is a pattern in which three performance symbols simultaneously start the pre-stop motion effect regardless of the motion mode of the pre-stop motion effect. Also, in any operation mode, there is a pattern in which the pre-stop action effect is started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of operation modes for the icon movement display effect for moving the suspended icon (first suspended icon HA or second suspended icon HB). For example, there may be a pattern in which the pending icon shifts horizontally and a pattern in which the pending icon slightly floats and moves horizontally. Also, for example, the operation mode of the icon movement display effect may differ depending on the effect mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the operation mode of the start operation production using the production design. For example, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the second action mode than in the first action mode of the action presentation at the start. On the other hand, the expected degree of big win does not differ depending on the operation mode of the icon movement display effect of the pending icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the operation mode of the pre-stop operation production using the production pattern, the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the fluctuation of the current special pattern, or the big hit in the fluctuation of the special pattern after the next The degree of expectation to become) is different. For example, the degree of expectation is higher for the second action mode than for the first action mode of the pre-stop action presentation. On the other hand, the degree of expectation does not differ depending on the operation mode of the icon movement display effect of the pending icon.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the action mode of the start time action effect using the effect pattern is selected and executed from among a plurality of action modes regardless of the set effect mode (stage). , the operation mode of the icon movement display effect may be selected according to the effect mode (stage).

Further, in the present embodiment, the action mode of the pre-stop action effect using the effect pattern is selected and executed from among a plurality of action modes regardless of the set effect mode (stage). , the operation mode of the icon movement display effect may be selected according to the effect mode (stage).

Moreover, even when the action effect at the start of any action mode is performed, the action effect at the start ends after the icon movement display effect ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the disappearance effect of the icon TI is performed in response to the reception of the change stop command, but the timing of performing the disappearance effect of the icon TI is not limited to this. For example, after receiving the change start command, the icon TI disappearing effect may be performed at the timing when the change time included in the change start command has passed. Also, the effect of disappearing the icon TI may be started at the timing of receiving the next variation start command or at the timing of receiving the customer waiting command.

Further, in the above description, in the normal losing variation, the effect of disappearing the icon TI is performed in response to the reception of the variation stop command. It may be hidden at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation of special symbols.

(Volume/light intensity adjustment operation when fluctuation starts and fluctuation stops)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating a predetermined button (for example, the upper button 191A or the lower button 193A) of the cross key 19, during the variable display of the special symbols, during the stop display of the special symbols, The volume of related sounds (BGM, sound effects, character voices, etc.) can be adjusted. Further, by operating another button (for example, left button 192A or right button 194A) of the cross key 19, the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 70 or the second The amount of light of the image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74 can be adjusted. Note that the volume of sounds related to various errors (unauthorized prize winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) is not changed by the operation using the cross key 19, and the sound volume related to the error The volume of (error notification sound) is always set to the maximum value. Hereinafter, the control when the cross key 19 is operated while the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and during the static display will be described.

FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect when a volume adjustment operation is performed during variable display and stop display of special symbols. FIGS. 51 and 52 are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the first image display device 70 at each timing of FIG. In addition, below, although the case where volume adjustment operation is performed during the variable display of the 1st special design is demonstrated, it is the same also when operation is performed during the variable display of the 2nd special design. Also, below, only the part related to the volume adjustment operation will be described in detail, and the first special symbol display device 60, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, and each object (effect symbol 701, small symbol 702, first Since the operation of the pending icon HA, the corresponding icon TI, and the first numeric pending SHA) is the same as the above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 50, at time t0, it is assumed that the customer is waiting. That is, it is assumed that the first reserved number U1 and the second reserved number U2 are zero and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is also assumed that BGM is not output (FIG. 51(a)). At time t0 in this state, when the volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the volume value is set, for example, from "2" to "3", and the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed. is displayed (FIG. 51(b)). In this embodiment, the volume value can be set in five steps from "1" to "5", for example. The volume value image OG is an image indicating which stage of the currently set volume value is from "1" to "5". The current volume value may be indicated, or the volume value may be indicated as a number. Moreover, the output of the volume adjustment sound is started from the moment the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 19 is performed. The volume adjustment sound is a sound indicating that a volume adjustment operation has been performed using the cross key 19, and is output for 0.8 seconds, for example. The volume adjustment sound is output with the newly set volume value.

The volume value image OG is displayed, for example, in the right area of the screen of the first image display device 70, for example, in an area overlapping the display area of the right pattern. In the figure, part of the right pattern overlaps the volume value image OG. In this case, the volume value image OG is drawn on the layer in front of the right pattern. That is, the volume value image OG is displayed preferentially over the right pattern, and part of the right pattern is rendered invisible or difficult to be visually recognized by the volume value image OG. When the variable display of the special symbol is not started, the volume value image OG is continuously displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the display is started.

Here, it is assumed that a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started within a predetermined time (10 seconds) after the volume value image OG is displayed ( Time t1, FIG. 51(c)).

At time t2, in response to the fact that the production control unit 130 receives the fluctuation start command, the fluctuation production using the production pattern 701 etc. is started (Fig. 51(d)), and the volume after being adjusted by the volume adjustment operation BGM starts to be output at . At this time, the volume value image OG is erased even before the predetermined time (10 seconds) has elapsed since the volume value image OG was displayed.

Specifically, the volume value image OG being displayed is erased in response to the reception of the change start command. Also, if the volume adjustment sound is being output when the fluctuation start command is received, the output of the volume adjustment sound is stopped. In addition, for a predetermined time (time t2 to t3; for example, 1 second) after receiving the fluctuation start command, the display of the volume value image OG is suppressed (restricted or limited), and the change of the volume value itself is suppressed. be. That is, during this period, even if the volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the volume value is not changed. Therefore, the volume value image OG is not displayed and the volume adjustment sound is not output.

Next, at time t3, for example, the icon TI is displayed, and the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 19 becomes possible again before the start operation effect using the effect pattern 701 ends. In addition, after the start operation effect using the effect pattern 701 is completed (that is, after the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 is started), the volume adjustment operation may be enabled.

Thereafter, at time t4 during the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701, when the volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the volume value is changed from "3" to "4", and the volume value image is displayed. OG is displayed (FIG. 51(f)). At this time as well, the volume adjustment sound is output.

Next, at time t5 during the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701, when the game ball wins the first start hole 45, an additional icon display effect is performed in response to the reception of the start winning command (Fig. 52 ( g)). If a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has not passed since the volume value image OG started to be displayed, the volume value image OG is continuously displayed even when the icon addition display effect is performed. It should be noted that a winning sound corresponding to the current volume value may be output along with the icon addition display effect.

Next, at time t6, a pre-stop action effect using the effect symbol 701 is performed (FIG. 52(h)). If a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has not passed since the volume value image OG started to be displayed, the volume value image OG is continuously displayed even during the pre-stop action presentation.

At time t7, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (FIG. 52(i)). At this time point, the effect pattern 701 is not actually stopped, and the volume value image OG is also continuously displayed.

Then, at time t8, in response to the fact that the production control unit 130 has received the fluctuation stop command, the production pattern 701 is actually stopped, the small pattern 702 is stopped and displayed, and the volume value image OG is erased ( FIG. 52(j)). The volume value image OG is forcibly erased even before a predetermined time (10 seconds) has elapsed since the volume value image OG was displayed. For a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after receiving the change stop command, the display of the volume value image OG is suppressed, and the change of the volume value itself is also suppressed.

Furthermore, the variable display of the next special symbol is started, and at time t9, in response to the reception of the next variation start command by the effect control unit 130, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is performed, The variable display of the small pattern 702 is started (FIG. 52(k)). During this time as well, the change in the volume value is suppressed, and the display of the volume value image OG is also suppressed.

After that, at time t10, during the start action effect using the effect pattern 701 (or after the start action effect), the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 19 becomes possible (FIG. 52(l)).

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can use the cross key 19 to adjust the sound volume during the variable display and stop display of the special symbols. Volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined time after the stop display of the special symbol.

Light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 is the same. Specifically, the player can use the cross key 19 to adjust the amount of light while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and during the stationary display. The light amount values of the first image display device 70, the second image display device 70, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, etc. can be adjusted in five steps from "1" to "5", for example. When a light amount adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the light amount value is adjusted, a light amount value image showing the current light amount value is displayed, and a light amount adjustment sound is output. This light quantity adjustment is suppressed in a predetermined period from the start of the special symbol fluctuation and in a predetermined period from the stop of the special symbol fluctuation. That is, the light amount adjustment itself is suppressed, and the display of the light amount value image and the output of the light amount adjustment sound are suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the effect symbol 701 from deteriorating due to the volume value image OG and the light intensity value image being displayed when the special symbol starts and stops varying. Also, if the volume adjustment sound or light amount adjustment sound is output when the special symbol fluctuation starts and stops, it is as if the sound was output by the special symbol fluctuation start or fluctuation stop (that is, based on the result of the jackpot determination (as if it were a sound) may mislead the player. For this reason, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are suppressed so that volume adjustment sound and light amount adjustment sound are not output for a predetermined time from the start and stop of fluctuation of the special symbols. This can prevent such misunderstandings from being given to the player.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the changeover switch 22 that can be basically operated by the game clerk. Light intensity adjustment is possible. Even if it is a predetermined time from the start or stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, when the changeover switch 22 is operated, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment may be performed. That is, for a predetermined time after the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 operable by the player are suppressed, but volume adjustment using the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk is performed. and light amount adjustment may not be suppressed. In this case, when the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the changeover switch 22 is performed in a predetermined time from the start or change stop of the special symbol, the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) itself is possible. , the display of the volume value image (or the light amount value image) may be suppressed, and the output of the volume adjustment sound (or the light amount adjustment sound) may be suppressed. Conversely, even in this case, the display of the volume value image (or the light amount value image) and the output of the volume adjustment sound (or the light amount adjustment sound) may not be suppressed.

Also, when volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed using the changeover switch 22, the volume value image OG or light intensity value image is displayed in the same manner as the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. FIG. For example, the display of the volume value image OG is updated even when the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, or when the volume is adjusted using the cross key 19. . Further, when the volume value is adjusted using the switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is displayed. Also in this case, the volume value image OG is erased when the special symbols start to fluctuate or stop fluctuating, and the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined period after the special symbols fluctuate or stop. If the volume value is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the changeover switch 22 is displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed. is performed, the display of the volume value image OG may be updated. The same applies to light amount adjustment.

Also, while the error notification sound is being output, volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the selector switch 22 is possible, but volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the cross key 19 may be suppressed. The error notification sound is a sound that is output when various errors (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) occur, and is output at the maximum volume. Even if the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 while the error notification sound is being output, the volume of the error notification sound being output is not adjusted. In addition, during the output of the effect sound other than the error notification sound (sound related to the effect based on the result of the big hit determination, such as the voice of the character, the effect sound suggesting the result of the big win determination, etc.), the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22. (or light amount adjustment) and volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the cross key 19 are possible, and when the volume adjustment is performed, the volume of the effect sound changes. In addition, as described above, volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined time from the start or end of the fluctuation of the special symbols.

Also, while the error notification sound is being output, the effect sound may not be output, or the volume of the effect sound may be reduced, thereby suppressing volume adjustment using the cross key 19 . That is, while the error notification sound is being output, the output of the effect sound is suppressed, and the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is also suppressed. As a method of suppressing the output of the effect sound during the output of the error notification sound, the effect sound is played internally, but the volume is set to zero (that is, muted. In other words, the inaudible sound is output). Any of a method, a method of not reproducing the effect sound, and a method of lowering the volume of the effect sound may be used.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the output of the error notification sound is started, even if the current volume value is set to a volume value lower than the maximum volume value, the current volume value When the effect sound is output at a volume value lower than the volume value (including a volume value of zero) and the output of the error notification sound ends, the volume of the effect sound volume value). When the volume value of the effect sound returns, the volume value image is not displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the display of the volume value image is suppressed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate and when the variation stops, the volume value image is erased. The display of the volume value image may be suppressed by moving the volume value image displayed in the layer on the front side of the production pattern 701 to the layer on the back side (background image side) of the production pattern 701.例文帳に追加That is, when the special symbols start to fluctuate and stop fluctuating, the effect pattern 701 may be displayed preferentially over the volume value image.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate during the output of the volume adjustment sound, or when the fluctuation stops, the volume adjustment sound being output is stopped. When the special symbol starts to fluctuate or stops fluctuating, the output of the volume adjustment sound may be continued until the output period of the volume adjustment sound (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses. Also in this case, the volume value image may be deleted. That is, when the volume value image is displayed and the volume adjustment sound is output by volume adjustment using the cross key 19, if the special symbol starts or stops fluctuating, the display of the volume value image is suppressed. , the output of the volume adjustment sound may continue.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the volume adjustment operation (or light amount adjustment operation) using the cross key 19 is performed in a period other than the time when the special symbol starts to fluctuate or the time when the fluctuation ends, the volume value image (or the light amount value image ) is displayed and a volume adjustment sound (light amount adjustment sound) is output, but in the modified example, the volume value image (or light amount value image) is not displayed, and only the volume adjustment sound (light amount adjustment sound) is output good. Even in this case, for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the start or end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the cross key 19 is suppressed, and the volume adjustment sound (light amount adjustment sound) is suppressed. Output is suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after performing the pre-stop motion presentation of the performance symbols, the stop display is performed, and the BGM is continuously output during the pre-stop motion presentation of the performance symbols and during the stop display of the performance symbols. . It is possible to adjust the volume of the BGM using the cross key 19 even during the performance of the action before stopping the performance pattern. Since the output of the BGM continues even while the performance pattern is performing the pre-stop motion performance, the continuity of the performance can be ensured and the transition to the next variation can be made smooth. In addition, since the volume can be adjusted even during the pre-stop action presentation, the volume can be adjusted at any time according to the taste of the player.

Further, in this embodiment, after performing the pre-stop motion presentation of the performance symbols, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and the BGM is continuously output during the pre-stop motion performance of the performance symbols and during the stop display of the performance symbols. It is possible to adjust the volume of the BGM using the cross key 19 even during the performance of the action before the stop of the performance pattern. Also, when an error notification sound is output during the pre-stop action presentation, the BGM being output is suppressed (volume reduction, muting, or playback stop). As a result, the sound volume can be adjusted even during the pre-stop action presentation, but when the error notification sound is output, the BGM is suppressed, so that the player can hear the error notification sound.

(Example of SPSP Reach production)
Next, an example of an effect when the ready-to-win effect is performed will be described. Below, the case where the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed among the ready-to-win effects will be described.

(Production example when loss is notified from SPSP reach production)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed. FIG. 54 is a continuation of the timing chart of FIG. 53, showing a timing chart when a loss is reported as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. 55 to 58 are diagrams showing examples of effects at the respective timings in FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG.

Before the time t0, it is assumed that three rights for judging the jackpot related to the first special symbol are reserved. As shown in FIG. 53, when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate at time t0, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variable display effect using the small symbol 702, and the sub-first variable display device 81 are used. A variable display, an icon movement display effect in which each first reserved icon HA shifts to the right, and the like are started (FIG. 55(a)). Incidentally, in practice, after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, an action effect at the start using the effect symbol 701, a variable display effect using the small symbol 702, and an icon movement display effect of each first pending icon HA, etc. is started, but since the deviation between the special symbol variation start timing and the start timing of each effect is as described above, it is omitted here.

When the starting operation production using the production pattern 701 is started, at time t1, the effect production at the start of adding an effect image 705a to each production pattern 701 is performed (FIG. 55(b)). In addition, in this start time effect presentation, a fluctuation start sound may be output together with the display of the effect image 705a. The fluctuating start sound may differ according to the display mode (blue or red) of the effect image 705a.

The starting effect effect is a effect in which a blue or red effect image 705a is superimposed on each of the three effect patterns 701, and a relatively small effect image 705a is gradually enlarged. The gaming machine 1 stores data representing an animation movie over a plurality of frames (for example, 45 to 60 frames; 1.5 seconds to 2 seconds) in which the effect image 705a is gradually enlarged. In addition, the effect production at the start is based on the result of the preliminary determination, and when it is performed at the start of each variation over the variation of a plurality of special symbols, based on the result of the preliminary determination or the jackpot determination, 1 special symbol variation may occur at the start of the Here, at the start of the variation of one special symbol, the start effect presentation is performed.

The effect presentation at the start is started at the timing after the action presentation at the start using the presentation pattern 701 is started, and ends during the action presentation at the start. For example, the start timing (time t0) of the action presentation at the start and the start timing (t1) of the effect presentation at the start may be shifted by about 0.5 seconds. By executing the effect presentation at the start after starting the action presentation at the start in this way, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the action presentation at the start using the presentation pattern 701 from being hindered, and at the start of the variation of the presentation pattern 701. can improve the interest of

The start timing (time t0) of the action presentation at the start and the start timing (t1) of the effect presentation at the start may be the same. Also, here, the effect production at the start is described for an example of production that is started during the first cycle variation of the special symbol. After that, the start-time effect presentation may be started.

Next, at time t2, the movement from the first pending icon HA1 to the icon TI is completed. At this time point, the action presentation at the start and the effect presentation at the start are being continued (FIG. 55(c)). Further, when the icon TI is displayed, the icon change effect of the icon TI may be started. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(c), at the timing when the first pending icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI, the icon TI changes from "white" to "blue". A changing icon change effect is started. The icon change effect is a effect in which the first pending icon HA or the icon TI changes. For example, the icon changes over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the effect is displayed around the changing icon. It is a performance to do. In the gaming machine 1, data indicating an animation composed of a plurality of frames (for example, 15 frames) for the icon change effect of the icon TI and animation for the icon change effect of the first pending icon HA are shown. data is stored.

The data indicating the animation for the icon change effect of the icon TI and the data indicating the animation for the icon change effect of the first pending icon HA may be the same. Further, the icon change effect of the icon TI can be executed not only at the start of variation of the special symbols but also at any timing during the variation of the special symbols.

Next, at time t3, the start effect presentation ends (FIG. 55(d)). The effect production at the start ends after the special symbols undergo a plurality of cycle fluctuations. Even when the effect presentation at the start ends, the action presentation at the start continues. Further, at time t3, the icon change effect of the icon TI has already ended, and the icon TI is displayed in blue, for example.

After that, at time t4, the action effect at the start ends, and the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 is started (FIG. 55(e)). Incidentally, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed, the execution time of the action effect at the start may be longer than in the case of the normal losing variation described with reference to FIG. 43 and the like. For example, the action effect at the start in the case of normal loss fluctuation is performed for 1 to 1.5 seconds, whereas the action effect at the start when the SPSP reach effect is performed is performed for 2 to 3 seconds. good. In addition, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed, the starting operation effect may be performed in a manner different from that in the case of the normal losing variation.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, at time t5, a pre-stop action effect for left symbols and right symbols is performed (FIG. 55(f)). Next, at time t6, the same kind of effect symbol 701 (for example, "1" symbol) as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, and ready-to-win is established (FIG. 56(g)). When the ready-to-win state is established, a ready-to-win notification effect is performed from time t6 to t7 (FIG. 56(h)).

The ready-to-win notification effect is an effect in which the same kind of effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides to notify that the ready-to-win state has been established, and is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, in the ready-to-win notification effect, the effect image 705b is added to the temporarily stopped left and right symbols, thereby causing the left and right symbols to emit light. In addition, in the ready-to-win notification effect, a horizontally long image (an image written as "ready-to-win") covering the display areas of the left and right symbols is superimposed on the left and right symbols and displayed. Also, in the ready-to-win notification effect, for example, a voice of a character "ready-to-win" is output from the speaker.

Next, at time t7, an N reach (normal reach) effect is started (FIG. 56(i)). Specifically, in the N reach effect, the left pattern and the right pattern are temporarily stopped, and a plurality of effect patterns 701 as medium patterns are displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the screen at a relatively slow speed. An effect is performed that makes the player expect that the same type of effect symbols as the left and right symbols will stop as middle symbols. During the N-reach performance, the normal background image displayed before execution of the N-reach performance is continuously displayed. In addition, according to the start of the N-reach effect, the output of BGM for N-reach, which is different from the normal BGM, is started. Further, during the N-reach production, a lamp lighting production may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (for example, blue) suggesting the possibility of a big win. The N-reach production is executed for a predetermined time (time t7-t8; for example, 10 seconds).

Next, in the final stage of the N-reach production, the middle pattern that was moving and displayed at a relatively slow speed accelerates, suggesting the development to the SP-reach production (Fig. 56(j)).

Next, at time t8, an SP development effect suggesting development to an SP ready-to-win effect is executed (FIG. 56(k)). In the SP development effect, for example, an effect is performed in which the character images in the left and right symbols are peeled off, and the left and right symbols composed of numeric images move in the horizontal direction of the screen while shrinking. Also, during the SP development effect, a background image for the SP development effect is displayed. Note that the normal background image may be displayed even during the SP development effect.

Then, at time t9, the SP ready-to-win effect is started (FIG. 56(l)). In the SP reach effect, the left pattern 701 and the right pattern 701 consisting of reduced number images temporarily stop in the left and right regions of the upper region in the screen, respectively, and the SP reach video effect corresponding to the SP reach effect ( For example, an effect in which a 2D animation character moves is performed. Also, at the start of the SP reach production, an effect image 705c is added to each of the left pattern 701 and the right pattern 701 so that the left pattern 701 and the right pattern 701 emit light. Further, according to the start of the SP reach performance, the background image changes from the normal background image to the SP reach background image, and the output of the SP reach BGM different from the normal BGM and the N reach BGM is started.

At times t9 to t10, the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, and effect is performed to make the player expect that the effect symbol 701 of the same kind as the left symbol and the right symbol will stop as a medium symbol (FIG. 57(m)). In addition, during the SP reach production, even if a lamp lighting production is performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and / or the board lighting device 74 is lit in a predetermined manner (for example, blue or green) that suggests the possibility of a big win good.

Next, at time t10 at the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, a blackout effect may be performed (FIG. 57(n)). The blackout effect is a effect that suggests the possibility of an SPSP ready-to-win effect, and is a effect that suggests a high possibility of development to the SPSP ready-to-win effect. In the blackout effect, the entire screen is blacked out (a black or gray image is displayed on the entire screen), and a button operation prompting image PBG prompting the player to operate the effect button 17 is displayed. Also, a validity period image YKG indicating the validity period of the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed. During the blackout effect, the effect pattern 701 is hidden. On the other hand, the small pattern 702 is continuously displayed to perform a variable display effect. Also, the first pending icon HA and the corresponding icon TI are displayed, and the first numeric pending SHA and the second numeric pending SHB are also continuously displayed. During the blackout effect, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI may be hidden, or the icon TI may be displayed while the first pending icon HA is hidden, The icon TI may be hidden while the first pending icon HA is displayed. Further, during the blackout effect, the lamp lighting effect in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner may be stopped (that is, the lamp is turned off), or the blackout effect is in progress. The lamp lighting effect may be continued.

During the blackout effect, the BGM output before the start of the blackout effect (here, SP reach BGM) is interrupted, and the BGM is not output, resulting in a silent state. In this silent state, effects other than BGM (for example, character voices, sounds prompting button operations, other effect sounds, etc.) may be output. Also, when various errors occur, the error notification sound is output at the maximum volume even during the blackout effect. After the output of the SP ready-to-win BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, when it develops into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win BGM is not restarted and a sound corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is output. On the other hand, when the SP ready-to-win performance is not developed after the output of the SP ready-to-win BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, the output of the SP ready-to-win effect and the BGM for the SP ready-to-win are restarted, and a failure is reported thereafter. Specifically, if the SP reach performance does not develop after the blackout effect, the reproduction of the SP reach BGM is continued during the black out effect, but the output of the SP reach BGM is suppressed by reducing the volume to zero or lowering. After that, the SP reach effect is resumed, the volume of the SP reach BGM is restored to the original volume, and the output of the SP reach BGM is resumed. When the SPSP ready-to-reach production develops after the blackout production, during the blackout production, the BGM for the SP reach is stopped (the reproduction of the BGM for the SP ready-to-reach is finished), and then the SPSP according to the development of the SPSP ready-to-win production. To output sounds (BGM and sound effects) related to the ready-to-win production. In addition, whether the SPSP ready-to-win effect develops after the blackout effect or does not develop to the SPSP ready-to-win effect, during the blackout effect, the SP reach BGM continues to be played, but the volume is reduced to zero or the SP is reduced. The output of BGM for reach may be suppressed.

Here, when the performance button 17 is pressed during the effective period after the blackout performance is started, or when the effective period elapses without the performance button 17 being operated, the SPSP ready-to-win performance is developed. SPSP development production suggesting that is performed.

After the SPSP development effect, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started at time t11 (FIG. 57(o)). In response to the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the SPSP ready-to-win background image is displayed and the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is started. Moreover, the first pending icon HA is hidden according to the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Further, during the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the small pattern 702 continues the variable display effect, the icon TI is continuously displayed, and the first number pending SHA and the second number pending SHB are also continuously displayed. In addition, during the SPSP ready-to-win production, a lamp lighting production is performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (for example, a red manner) suggesting that the possibility of a big win is relatively high. may be done. In addition to the first pending icon HA, the icon TI may also be hidden during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Further, during the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the icon TI may be hidden while the first pending icon HA is displayed.

During the SPSP ready-to-win production, in the left and right areas of the upper area of the screen, the relatively small left pattern 701 and right pattern 701 consisting of numerical images are temporarily stopped, respectively, and in the center of the screen, a moving image production for the SPSP ready-to-win production (for example, An effect in which a 3D character moves is performed.

Next, at time t12 at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, a final effect is executed (FIG. 57(p)). Here, the decisive effect is an effect that is performed immediately before notification of whether or not a big win has occurred, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big win. Immediately after the determined performance, whether or not the jackpot is won is notified. For example, as the final effect, an operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is executed, or instead of the operation promotion effect, a production pattern 701 of the same kind as the left pattern and the right pattern moves at a low speed in the center of the screen, An effect that makes the player expect to stop in the center of the screen is performed. Here, for example, as an example of a decision effect, an operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is executed.

Specifically, at time t12, a valid period image YKG indicating the valid period of the operation is displayed together with the button operation prompting image PBG prompting the player to operate the effect button 17 (FIG. 57(p)). As the button operation prompting image PBG, an image simulating the effect button 17 in the normal state or an image simulating the effect button 17 in the projecting state is displayed. When an image simulating the effect button 17 in the projecting state is displayed as the button operation prompting image PBG, the effect button 17 changes to the projecting state. When the performance button 17 changes to the protruding state, the expectation of big hit is higher than when the performance button 17 is in the normal state.

It should be noted that the production button 17 may change to the protruding state even during a period other than the determined production (the first half of the ready-to-win production. For example, during the blackout production shown in FIG. 57(n) before the start of the SPSP ready-to-win production). The production button 17 is more likely to change to the projecting state in the latter half of the ready-to-win production (for example, during the final production) than in the first half of the production.

Further, during the operation prompting presentation, the output of the BGM for SPSP reach is stopped, and a silent state in which the BGM is not output is established. In this silent state, a predetermined effect sound other than the BGM or an operation prompting sound prompting the player to operate the effect button 17 may be output. Further, when various errors occur, the error notification sound is output at the maximum volume even during the operation prompting effect as the final effect. In response to the execution of the operation promotion performance as the final performance, the SPSP ready-to-win BGM output before the execution of the operation promotion performance is stopped and not reproduced internally. While the SPSP ready-to-win BGM continues to be played during the operation promoting effect as the final effect, the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM may be suppressed by reducing the volume to zero or lowering.

Then, at time t13, when the effect button 17 is pressed during the effective period, or when the effective period has passed without being operated on the effect button 17, the result of the big hit determination is notified. Here, since the result of the big win determination is a loss, a failure effect is performed to notify the loss (FIG. 57(q)). Specifically, as the middle symbol, the effect symbol 701 different from the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, and the failure is reported. At this point, the small pattern 702 continues the variable display effect. Also, during execution of the failure effect, BGM and sound effects corresponding to the failure effect (loss notification effect) are output. During execution of the failure effect, the output of the BGM for SPSP ready-to-win that was stopped (suppressed) during the operation promotion effect may be resumed. Further, during the failure effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined mode (white mode) suggesting a failure.

Next, at time t14, the switching image is displayed on the entire screen (FIG. 57(r)). In this switching image, the effect symbol 701 is hidden, and the icon TI is also hidden. On the other hand, the small pattern 702 is continuously displayed, and a variable display effect is performed. The first digit pending SHA and the second digit pending SHB are also continuously displayed.

At subsequent time t15, the SPSP ready-to-win background image is switched to the normal background image, and the three production patterns 701 return to the normal size including the number image and the character image, and the three production patterns 701 are lost. mode (Fig. 58(s)). Also, the first pending icon HA is displayed again, and the icon TI is also displayed. Further, the small pattern 702 continues the variable display effect, and the first number pending SHA and the second number pending SHB are also continuously displayed.

Next, at time t16, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (FIG. 58(t)), and at subsequent time t17, the production control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command, and three production designs 701 are displayed. Along with the actual stop, the small pattern 702 is also stopped and displayed (Fig. 58(u)). Further, in response to the reception of the change stop command, the disappearing effect of the icon TI is also started.

Then, at time t18 after 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display of the first special symbol, the variation of the next special symbol is started, and similarly to the above, the effect control unit 130 receives the variation start command. Then, the start operation effect using the effect pattern 701 and the like are executed.

(Production example when a jackpot is notified from the SPSP reach production)
Next, an effect when a big win is announced as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when a big win is notified as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a big win is notified as a result of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Until the determined effect at time t12, the effect is performed in the same manner as in FIGS. 55(a) to 57(p). As shown in FIG. 59, at time t13 after the determined effect of FIG. When the effective period has passed without being performed, a success effect for reporting a big win is executed (FIG. 60 (q-2)). Specifically, by temporarily stopping the same type of middle pattern ("1" pattern in this case) as the left and right patterns, the three same type of production patterns 701 are temporarily stopped, and a big win is notified. During this success effect, an effect image 705d is added to the medium symbol. At this point, the small pattern 702 continues the variable display effect. In addition, during execution of the success effect, BGM and sound effects are output to notify of a big win. It should be noted that, instead of displaying the image shown in FIG. 60(q-2), by operating the movable effect device 73, a success effect of informing a big win may be executed. In this case, the movable effect device 73 operates and appears in front of the screen of the first image display device 70, and an image (image other than the effect pattern 701) announcing the big win is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. For example, a rainbow-colored background image) is displayed. Further, during the success effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (rainbow color manner) suggesting a big win.

Next, at time t14, the screen is switched to a big win background image showing a big win, and a symbol enlargement effect is performed in which three effect symbols 701 are enlarged and displayed over the entire screen (FIG. 60 (r-2)). In this design enlargement performance, three performance designs 701 made up of enlarged number images are displayed in the center of the screen, and an effect image 705e is added around each performance design 701 . Further, the icon TI is erased according to the execution of the symbol enlargement effect. Further, even during the symbol enlargement effect, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect, and the first number pending SHA and the second number pending SHB are also continuously displayed. In addition, during the symbol enlargement effect, BGM and sound effects are output to notify the big win. Further, during the symbol enlargement effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (rainbow color manner) suggesting a big win.

Next, after the symbol enlargement effect, the three effect symbols 701 made up of numeric images are reduced, and at time t15, the three effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped (Fig. 60 (s-2)). By adding an effect image 705f to each of the three performance designs 701 while the three performance designs 701 are temporarily stopped, a big win light emission performance is performed in which the performance designs 701 emit light. Even during this jackpot light emission effect, the small pattern 702 continues the variable display effect. Further, the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 may perform a lamp lighting effect in which the lighting device 74 is continuously lit in a predetermined manner (rainbow-colored manner).

After that (for example, one second after the end of the jackpot light emitting effect), at time t16, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (Fig. 60 (t-2)), and at subsequent time t17, the effect control unit 130 In response to receiving the fluctuation stop command, the three production patterns 701 are actually stopped, and the small patterns 702 are also stopped and displayed (FIG. 60 (u-2)).

Note that unlike the case of losing, in the case of a big win, the icon TI is not displayed during the stop display of the special symbols. In addition, in the case of losing, the background image for SPSP ready-to-win is switched to the normal background image, and the mode of the effect pattern 701 returns to the normal mode including the number image and the character image. On the other hand, in the case of a big win, the SPSP ready-to-win background image is switched to a big win background image, and the effect pattern 701 is displayed in the form of a number image that does not include a character image. Even in the case of a big hit, while the performance pattern 701 is temporarily stopped in the jackpot mode (time t15 to t16), the mode of the performance pattern 701 may be displayed in a normal mode including a number image and a character image. good. Further, the icon TI may be displayed while the effect symbol 701 is temporarily stopped in the jackpot mode. In this case, even when the effect symbol 701 is actually stopped in response to the reception of the change stop command, the disappearing effect of the icon TI may not be performed. In the case of a big win, for example, after FIG. 60(q-2), the normal background image is displayed, and the mode of the effect pattern 701 is displayed in the normal mode including the number image and the character image, and the icon TI and A first pending icon HA may be displayed.

Then, 0.5 seconds after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the production control unit 130, and the opening production is started in response to the reception of the opening command. (time t18, FIG. 60(v)).

Although illustration is omitted, when a big hit or a loss is reported as a result of the SP ready-to-win effect without developing into the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is not performed after FIG. 57(n). , medium symbols are stopped and a big hit or a loss is reported. Alternatively, after FIG. 57(m), the middle symbols are stopped without performing the blackout effect, and a big hit or a loss is announced. Specifically, in the case of a big hit, as a result of the SP ready-to-win effect, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped, and the three same type of effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped to notify the big win. While the three same kind of performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, the small symbols 702 continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed, and the periodic operation is maintained. Thereafter, in response to the reception of the change stop command, the three same kind of performance symbols 701 are actually stopped and the small symbols 702 are stopped and displayed, during which the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the periodic operation of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI may be continued, or the periodic operation may be stopped. Then, the opening effect is started in the same manner as in FIG. 60(v), and the jackpot game is started. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, as a result of the SP ready-to-win effect, the left and right middle symbols of different types are temporarily stopped, and the loss is reported. While the three performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped in a failing mode, the small symbols 702 continue to be variably displayed, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed, and the periodic operation is maintained. After that, the background image for SP reach is switched to the normal background image, and the three performance symbols 701 are stopped in a failing manner in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, and the small symbols 702 are stopped and displayed. During that time, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the periodic operation of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI may be continued, or the periodic operation may be stopped.

Also, although illustration is omitted, if a big hit or a loss is notified as a result of the N reach effect without developing into the SP reach effect, the SP reach effect is not performed after FIG. 56(j). , medium symbols are stopped and a big hit or a loss is reported. In this case, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed without being hidden, even while the big win or loss is being reported. Specifically, in the case of a big hit, as a result of the N-reach effect, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and the three same kind of effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped to notify the big win. While the three same kind of performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, the small symbols 702 continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed, and the periodic operation is maintained. Thereafter, in response to the reception of the change stop command, the three same kind of performance symbols 701 are actually stopped and the small symbols 702 are stopped and displayed, during which the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the periodic operation of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI may be continued, or the periodic operation may be stopped. Then, the opening effect is started in the same manner as in FIG. 60(v), and the jackpot game is started. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, as a result of the N-reach production, the medium symbols of different types from the left and right are temporarily stopped, and the loss is reported. While the three performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped in a failing mode, the small symbols 702 continue to be variably displayed, the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed, and the periodic operation is maintained. After that, in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, the three production patterns 701 are stopped in a failing manner and the small patterns 702 are stopped and displayed, during which the first pending icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. . At this time, the periodic operation of the first pending icon HA and the icon TI may be continued, or the periodic operation may be stopped.

In addition, when the variation pattern for executing the SPSP ready-to-win effect is selected, the SPSP ready-to-win effect may be performed after the N ready-to-win effect without going through the SP ready-to-win effect. Further, when the variation pattern OP4 for executing the special ready-to-win effect is selected, the special ready-to-win effect is performed after the N-reach effect or the SP ready-to-win effect (or without performing the N-reach effect or the SP ready-to-win effect). The special ready-to-win production is a production that suggests that a jackpot game is performed (confirmation of a jackpot game), and a pattern row in which three similar production patterns 701 are aligned (for example, "111" or "222"). After an effect of moving in a predetermined direction (from top to bottom) is executed for a predetermined time, three same type of effect symbols 701 are stopped.

The above effect is merely an example, and various effects suggesting the result of the big hit determination may be performed while the special symbols are changing.

For example, when it is determined to be a jackpot, a jackpot game is performed after an N reach effect, an SP reach effect, or an effect indicating that there is a high possibility of losing as a result of the SPSP reach effect (reach loss effect). A resurrection effect may be performed to suggest that it will be done. Regardless of whether or not the resurrection effect is performed after the reach failure effect, it suggests that the revival effect may be performed before performing the reach failure effect (for example, during the reach effect or before the start of the reach effect). A resurrection suggestion production may be performed.

Further, for example, in addition to the effects shown in FIG. 57(n) and FIG. 57(p), an operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the operation of the effect button 17, and when the operation is performed, a predetermined effect is executed. It may be possible. This predetermined effect may or may not be accompanied by an operation promoting effect, and at a predetermined timing before the SP development effect or SPSP development effect is performed, the operation promoting effect is not executed. may be restricted. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot accompanied by a shift to the variable probability game state, the execution of the operation promotion effect at a predetermined timing before such SP development effect and SPSP development effect is performed is restricted. It is performed with a predetermined probability without being played, and when the operation for the effect button 17 is performed in response to the performance of this operation promoting effect, a predetermined effect (for example, a effect suggesting a probability variable jackpot) is performed. will be That is, if the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot with a transition to the probability variable gaming state, the execution of the operation promotion effect at the predetermined timing is restricted (regulated), and the result of the jackpot determination is the transition to the probability variable gaming state. , the performance of the operation promotion performance at the predetermined timing is not limited (regulated). In addition, as a method of limiting the execution of the operation promotion effect at a predetermined timing, there are a method of setting the execution probability to zero in advance, a method of setting a relatively low execution probability in advance and limiting the execution by lottery, etc. .

Also, in the above description, the effect when the first special symbol varies in the normal game state has been described, but the same effect is performed when the second special symbol varies. In addition, when the second special symbol varies, an effect different from when the first special symbol varies may be performed. Also, in the probability variable gaming state and the time saving gaming state, an effect different from the above-described effect is performed. It should be noted that the same production as the above may be performed also in the probability variable gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

For example, in the variable probability gaming state, the first period after the special game is performed (period until the special symbols are changed the first number of times) and the second period different from the first period (for example, A period shorter than the first period), the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different, and the contents of the production and / or The selection rate of production may differ. For example, in the first period, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, after performing an operation promotion effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 17 with a first probability, a loss notification effect is executed. However, in the second period, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the operation promotion performance is performed with a second probability higher than the first probability, and then the loss notification performance is executed. You may

In addition, in the normal game state, the front-stage production (for example, the start operation production and the variable display production using the production pattern 701) is followed by the subsequent rear-stage production (for example, the ready-to-win production), and in the latter-stage production, information advantageous to the player is notified. In the probability variable game state, after executing the same pre-stage performance as in the normal game state, the post-stage performance is performed, and information advantageous to the player in the post-stage performance is different from the first report performance. You may perform the 2nd information production|presentation which alert|reports.

In addition, a first pattern for performing a subsequent stage performance from the former stage performance (for example, a start operation performance or a variable display performance using the performance pattern 701) and notifying information regarding the execution of the big hit game in the latter stage performance, and the first pattern. After executing a front-stage effect different from the pattern 2, the same rear-stage effect as in the first pattern is executed, and a second pattern in which advantageous information for the player is notified in the latter-stage effect can be executed. may In addition, when the symbol indicating the result of the big hit determination is stopped and displayed, it may be possible to execute a post-stage effect.

Also, for example, when the 10R variable probability jackpot is won, it is possible to execute a specific aspect of a plurality of specific effects suggesting that a jackpot game will be performed, and when the 4R probability variable jackpot is won, The production of the specific aspect may be configured to be unexecutable. Also, for example, in the normal game state, even when the 10R probability variable jackpot is won or when the 4R probability variable jackpot is won, the production of the specific mode can be executed, and in the probability variable game state, when the 10R probability variable jackpot is won. Although the performance of the specific mode can be executed, the performance of the specific mode may not be executed when the 4R probability variable jackpot is won.

Further, in the above production example, in the normal losing variation, three production patterns 701 of the first size are displayed on the first background image (background image of one of the production modes A to C), and at the start An action effect and a variable display effect are performed, and then a pre-stop action effect is performed using three effect patterns 701 of the first size, and the three effect patterns 701 are stopped and displayed. In addition, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, in the SP reach fluctuation or the SP SP reach fluctuation, the three production patterns 701 of the first size are displayed on the first background image, and the operation at the start Perform production, perform pre-stop action production using two production patterns 701 of the first size, temporarily stop the two production patterns 701, and create a second background image (background image corresponding to SP reach production , a background image corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win effect), the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect are performed in a state in which two effect patterns 701 having a second size smaller than the first size are temporarily stopped, and then the second After returning to the background image of No. 1, three performance patterns 701 of the first size are stopped and displayed. That is, even in the normal losing variation, the SP ready-to-win variation, and the SP ready-to-win variation, the performance pattern 701 of the second size is used so as not to perform the motion performance at the start and the motion performance before the stop. In another example of the effect, the second size effect pattern 701 may be used to perform the action effect at the start and/or the action effect before the stop. Also, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, in the SP reach fluctuation or the SPSP reach fluctuation, the first background image (for example, the background image corresponding to the production mode A) of the first size Three performance patterns 701 are displayed to perform a motion performance at the start, two performance patterns 701 of the first size are used to perform a pre-stop motion performance, the two performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped, and a second performance pattern 701 is displayed. SP ready-to-win production and SPSP ready-to-win production are performed in a state in which two production patterns 701 of a second size smaller than the first size are temporarily stopped on the background image of , and then different from the first background image. Three production patterns 701 of the first size may be stopped and displayed on the third background image (background image corresponding to production mode B).

In addition, when it is determined as a big hit, before the N reach performance is performed, during the N reach performance, during the SP reach performance, or during the SP SP reach performance, the final performance suggesting that the jackpot game will be performed is 1 or It may be done multiple times. For example, as a fixed effect, a effect in which a premium character appears, an effect in which a rainbow-colored image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and/or the second image display device 71, an effect in which the movable effect device 73 emits rainbow-colored light, An effect such as lighting the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device, or the effect button 17 in rainbow colors may be performed. For example, during the SPSP ready-to-win presentation, an operation prompting presentation to prompt the operation of the presentation button 17 is performed, and when the presentation button 17 is pressed during the effective period of the operation, a cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70. . The cut-in images include a blue cut-in image with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win, a red cut-in image with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win, and a rainbow-colored cut-in image suggesting that a jackpot game will be played. Any one of these may be displayed in response to pressing of the effect button 17 . Further, when the rainbow-colored cut-in image is displayed, the effect button 17 is vibrated during display of the rainbow-colored cut-in image or before the rainbow-colored cut-in image is displayed, and the blue cut-in image is displayed. is displayed, the effect button 17 may not be vibrated during or before the blue cut-in image is displayed. In addition, before the N reach effect is performed, during the N reach effect, during the SP reach effect, or during the SP SP reach effect, the jackpot game is executed without the operation promotion effect (without the operation of the effect button 17). A definite effect suggesting that it will be performed may be performed.

(Specific example of look-ahead effect)
Next, a specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the result of the prior determination, as the look-ahead effect (read-ahead continuous effect) that is performed over the variation of a plurality of special symbols, effect effect at the start, chance eye effect, and , zone effects may be executed. Only one of these three look-ahead continuous effects may be executed, or more than one may be executed. In the following, when it is determined in advance that the SPSP reach production is performed in advance determination, in the fluctuation before the special symbol fluctuation (prefetch target fluctuation) in which the SPSP reach production is performed, the case where the read-ahead continuous production is executed A production example will be described.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the look-ahead continuous effect is performed two fluctuations before the look-ahead target fluctuation. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 61, and is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart from one variation before the look-ahead target variation to the middle of the look-ahead target variation. FIGS. 63 to 66 are diagrams showing examples of effects at the respective timings of FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61, it is assumed that three rights of the jackpot judgment relating to the first special symbol are reserved, and the first reserved icon HA3 to be read ahead is displayed in blue. At this time, at time t0, when the first special symbol relating to the second variation before the look-ahead object starts to fluctuate, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variable display effect using the small symbol 702, and the sub-first variable display. The variable display using the device 81, the icon moving display effect of each first pending icon HA, and the like are started (FIG. 63(a)). In fact, after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variable display effect using the small symbol 702, the variable display using the sub first variable display 81, etc. However, since the deviation of the start timing is as described above, the explanation is omitted here.

When the starting operation production using the production pattern 701 is started, at time t1, the effect production at the start of adding an effect image 705a to each production pattern 701 is performed (FIG. 63(b)).

Next, at time t2, the movement of each first pending icon HA is completed. At this time point, the start-time action presentation and the start-time effect presentation are continuing (FIG. 63(c)).

Next, at time t3, the start effect rendering ends (FIG. 63(d)). At this time point, the start-time action presentation continues. Further, at the time t4, the starting action effect is completed, and the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 is executed (FIG. 63(e)).

After a predetermined period of time has passed, the zone effect is started at time t5 (FIG. 63(f)). At the start of the zone production, a zone entry image is displayed to suggest the start of the zone production. Further, in response to the start of the zone effect, a zone display image 707 indicating that the zone effect is being executed is displayed, and the background image changes from the normal background image to the zone background image. The zone display image 707 is, for example, an image in which the characters "zone" are superimposed on a strip-shaped image elongated in the left-right direction, and the characters "zone" move from left to right. The zone display image 707 is arranged on the layer on the front side of the background image, and is arranged on the layer on the back side of the production design 701 (that is, the production design 701 is preferentially displayed). Note that the zone display image 707 may be arranged in a layer on the front side of the effect pattern 701 . As the zone display image 707, there are images corresponding to each of the "weak zone" and the "strong zone", and here, the zone display image 707 corresponding to the weak zone is displayed. Also, the zone background image is, for example, an image in which a predetermined character moves, and there are images corresponding to each of the "weak zone" and the "strong zone" as the zone background image. Zone display images 707 and zone background images are displayed over one or more special symbol variations. Also, zone BGM is output instead of the normal BGM during execution of the zone effect. Incidentally, the normal BGM may be output during execution of the zone effect. Note that during the zone effect, in addition to the band-shaped zone display image 707, another image indicating that the zone effect is being executed may be displayed. Further, during the zone effect, the image of the pending icon or the pedestal of the icon (image for forming the display area of the pending icon or the icon) may be switched to an image unique to the zone effect.

When the zone BGM is output during execution of the zone effect, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed by continuing the reproduction of the normal BGM and reducing the volume of the normal BGM to zero or lowering the volume of the normal BGM during the output of the zone BGM. good too. In addition, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect of displaying a character suggesting the result of the big hit determination, and it may be possible to output the voice of the character (suggestive effect sound) during the suggestive effect. On the premise that such a suggestive effect can be executed both during the zone effect and when not during the zone effect, when the suggestive effect is executed during the zone effect, the character's voice is more pronounced than when the zone effect is not in progress. It may be output at a low volume, may be output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM, or may not be output.

Next, at time t6, the icon change rendering for the first pending icon HA2 related to the change of the prefetch target is started (FIG. 64(g)). For example, the first pending icon HA2 changes from "blue" to "red" by the icon change effect. An icon change sound may be output along with the icon change effect. The icon change sound is a sound corresponding to the display mode of the changed pending icon, and may be the same sound as the winning sound output when the game ball enters the starting hole.

Next, the left pattern and the right pattern perform a pre-stop action effect at different timings, respectively, and then temporarily stop. Then, at time t7 when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from time t6, the third middle symbol performs a pre-stop action effect (FIG. 64(h)), and at time t8, the middle symbol temporarily stops. (Fig. 64(i)).

At time t9 immediately after the middle symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, 0.5 seconds later), the look-ahead chance effect using the three effect symbols 701 is started (FIG. 64(j)). The look-ahead chance effect is a effect in which an effect image 705h is displayed around each effect pattern 701, and is a combination that does not indicate a big win, and is a specific combination (for example, a combination of even-numbered patterns or an odd-numbered pattern). (Combination) is an effect in which the effect pattern 701 is temporarily stopped to notify a failure. The look-ahead chance performance is a performance that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high in the next and subsequent special symbol fluctuations. Note that the look-ahead chance display includes a first mode (combination of even-numbered symbols and a mode in which a blue effect image 705h is added) and a second mode in which the expectation of a big win is higher than in the first mode. (Combination of odd-numbered symbols, mode in which red effect image 705h is added). Further, in the look-ahead chance effect, a stop sound may be output. This stop sound may be different between the first mode and the second mode.

At time t10 after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has passed from time t9, the look-ahead chance effect ends (the effect image 705h is erased), and the three performance symbols 701 indicating failure are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 64 ( k)). Then, at time t11, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the three production symbols 701 are actually stopped in response to the reception of the variation stop command (FIG. 64(l)). When the three production patterns 701 are actually stopped, the stop sound that has started to be output together with the start of the look-ahead chance production has ended. Specifically, the output of the stop sound is finished before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the stop sound may be output even at the timing when the first special symbol is stop-displayed and at the timing when the three production symbols 701 are actually stopped.

Actually, after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the main stop of the production pattern 701, the stop display of the small pattern 702, and the stop display of the sub-first variable display 81 are performed. Since the deviation of is as described above, the description is omitted here.

In this way, after the pre-stop action effect and the temporary stop are performed in order for the three effect symbols 701 based on the result of the preliminary determination, the look-ahead chance effect may be executed. For example, after the left pattern performs the pre-stop motion effect, it temporarily stops, then the right symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect, and then temporarily stops, and finally, the middle symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect. After that, stop temporarily. Then, immediately after the third middle symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image 705h is simultaneously added to the three performance symbols 701. - 特許庁It should be noted that it is not limited to the case where the three production patterns 701 perform the pre-stop motion production and the temporary stop in order, and at least two of the three production patterns 701 may perform the pre-stop motion production and the temporary stop at the same time. . Even in this case, when the look-ahead chance effect is executed, the addition of the effect image 705h to the three effect symbols 701 is performed at the same time. For example, after the left pattern and the right pattern perform the pre-stop motion effect and the temporary stop at the same time, the middle symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect and the temporary stop. may be added. Further, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may perform the pre-stop action effect and the temporary stop at the same time, and then the effect image 705h may be added to the three effect symbols 701 at the same time.

At time 12 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed from time t11, the next special symbol variation display (one variation before the look-ahead target) is started (FIG. 65(m)). Specifically, in the same manner as described above, the start-time action production using the production pattern 701 or the like is started, and the start-time effect production is executed.

Next, at time t13, a variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 is started (FIG. 65(n)), and after a predetermined time elapses, each of the three effect patterns 701 stops (at different timings or at the same time). Pre-action effect and temporary stop are performed (immediately before time t14, FIG. 65(o)).

Then, at time t14, the second look-ahead chance effect is started (FIG. 65(p)). In the second look-ahead chance effect, an effect different from the first look-ahead chance effect may be performed. For example, the first look-ahead chance performance may be performed in a first mode, and the second look-ahead chance performance may be performed in a second mode with a higher expectation of a big win.

At time t15, the look-ahead chance effect is finished (the effect image 705h is erased), and the three effect symbols 701 indicating the failure are temporarily stopped (FIG. 65(q)). Then, at time t16, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the three production symbols 701 are actually stopped according to the reception of the variation stop command (FIG. 65(r)).

Further, at time 17 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the next special symbol variation display (prefetch target variation) is started (FIG. 66(s)). In the same manner as described above, the starting operation production using the production pattern 701 is started, and the starting effect production is executed. Here, the aspect of the effect production at the start of the look-ahead target fluctuation may be an aspect with a higher expectation for the big win than the effect production at the start of the two fluctuations before and one fluctuation before, or the aspect with the same expectation. good too.

Next, at time t18, the N-reach effect is started (FIG. 66(t)). The zone background image is displayed as the background image until the N-reach effect is being performed. In addition, according to the start of the N-reach performance or before the start of the N-reach performance, the mode of the zone performance changes from the "weak zone performance" to the "strong zone performance" with a higher expectation of big win. Along with this change, the characters in the zone display image 707 also change to "strong zone". Note that the "weak zone effect" may be changed to the "strong zone effect" at any timing.

Then, after the SP development effect is performed, the SP ready-to-win effect is started at time t19 (Fig. 66(u)). The background image changes from the zone background image to the background image for SP reach according to the start of the SP reach effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 66(u), a horizontally elongated zone display image 707 was displayed until during the N reach effect, but changes to a vertically elongated zone display image 707 according to the start of the SP reach effect. .

When the SP ready-to-win effect ends, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started at time t20 via the SPSP developing effect (FIG. 66(v)). In accordance with the start of the SPSP reach production, the background image for SP reach is changed to the background image for SPSP reach. Further, the zone display image 707 is hidden according to the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Since the subsequent SPSP ready-to-win effects are the same as those described above, the description thereof is omitted.

Note that the zone display image 707 may be displayed even during the SPSP ready-to-win effect. In addition, in the above production example, even when the zone production is executed, the SP reach background image is displayed during the SP reach production, and the SPSP reach background image is displayed during the SPSP reach production. In the example of the effect, when the zone effect is executed, the zone background image may be displayed during the SP ready-to-win effect and also during the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Thus, in the present embodiment, after performing the action effect at the start of the effect symbol in response to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the variable display is started, and the action effect at the start is being executed even before the start time action effect is started. Also in , a background effect using a background image (motion of a zone background image, motion of a normal background image) is performed. For this reason, before the start of the variable display of the special design, attention is paid to the background, but in response to the start of the fluctuation display of the special design, by performing the operation production at the start using the production design, the production design from the state where the background is paid attention to. , and it is possible to appeal that the special symbol variation will start. In addition, when the background effect is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination, the player can be expected to see the subsequent changes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after performing the action effect at the start of the effect symbol in response to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the variable display is started, and the background image is used even when the action effect at the start of the effect symbol is started. A background production is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the background and to pay attention to the effect pattern from the state where the player pays attention to the background.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the pre-stop operation effect using the effect pattern is performed, the effect pattern and the small pattern are stopped, and the background image using the background image is displayed even during the stop of the effect pattern and the stop of the small pattern. A performance is taking place. Therefore, when the performance symbols are stopped, attention can be paid to the performance symbols, and after the performance symbols are stopped, the background can be focused.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the pre-stop action effect using the effect pattern is performed, the effect pattern and the small pattern are stopped, and the background effect using the background image is performed even during the pre-stop action effect of the effect pattern. It is Therefore, when the performance symbols are stopped, attention can be paid to the performance symbols, and after the performance symbols are stopped, the background can be focused.

(Example of effect when command is not received)
Next, an example of an effect when the effect control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100 will be described. For example, if a connection failure occurs between the main control unit 100 and the production control unit 130, or due to some external influence (such as jamming radio waves), the production control unit 130 cannot normally receive commands from the main control unit 100. Sometimes.

Below, the case where the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100 when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display and the first reservation number U1 is "3" will be described. do. Also, based on the third hold (hereinafter referred to as "prefetching target"), the prefetching continuous effect (zone effect) is being executed, and in the fluctuation before the prefetching target fluctuation, as a special symbol fluctuation pattern, It is assumed that the normal losing variation pattern HP1 or HP2 without the ready-to-win effect is selected.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the effect control section 130 cannot receive commands from the main control section 100 during variable display of special symbols. FIGS. 68 and 69 are diagrams showing an example of the effects at each timing of FIG. 67. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 67, at time t0, the effect symbol 701 is executing the variable display effect, and the small symbol 702 and the first sub variable display 81 are also being variable displayed. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "3" (the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up). Also, the number of reservations indicated by the first sub-reservation display 83 is "3" (the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up). In addition, the number of reservations indicated by the first reservation icon HA and the first number reservation SHA is also "3". A zone background image is displayed as a background image, and a zone display image 707 is displayed to indicate that the zone effect is being executed.

It is assumed that, during execution of such an effect, the effect control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100 at time t1. Even in this case, the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 is continued. Also, the variable display effect of the small pattern 702 and the variable display of the first sub-variable display 81 are continuously performed. Also, the zone effect is continuously executed. Also, various effects determined at the start of this variation or before the start are also executed at predetermined timings.

Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the performance symbol 701 performs pre-stop motion rendering and temporary stop in the order determined at the time of the start of the variation. For example, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, if it is decided to stop in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, according to the passage of time, the left symbol performs a pre-stop action effect, and then temporarily stops. Then, after the right symbol performs a pre-stop action presentation, it is temporarily stopped.

Then, at time t2, the medium symbol performs a pre-stop action effect (FIG. 68(b)). At the time t3, when the pre-stop action effect by the middle symbol is finished, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 68(c)). In addition, when execution of the look-ahead chance eye effect is determined in this variation, the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed.

Next, at time t4, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (FIG. 68(d)). Specifically, the main control unit 100 stops and displays the first special symbol, and transmits a variation stop command to the effect control unit 130 . However, the effect control section 130 cannot receive the fluctuation stop command from the main control section 100 . Therefore, even after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (even after the timing when the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command in a normal state), the temporary stop (swing) of the three effect symbols 701 is continued. . Also, the variable display of the small pattern 702 is continuously executed. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 also continues the variable display. Also, the icon TI is continuously displayed. Also, the three first pending icons HA are continuously displayed. Also, the zone production is continuously executed. BGM is also continuously output.

Next, at time t5, the first reservation number U1 is decreased from "3" to "2" in the main control unit 100, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started (FIG. 68(e)). That is, the change two before the prefetch target is started. Specifically, the main control unit 100 starts the variable display of the first special symbol and transmits a variable start command to the effect control unit 130 . However, the effect control section 130 cannot receive the variation start command from the main control section 100 . Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variable display effect using the small symbol 702, and the variable display of the sub first variable display 81 not started. On the other hand, the temporary stop (oscillation) of the three performance symbols 701 is continued, the variable display performance of the small symbols 702 is also continuously executed, and the sub-first variable display 81 also continues the variable display. Further, the icon moving display effect of the first pending icon HA is not started, and the pending number indicated by the sub-first pending display 83 and the first numeric pending SHA remains "3". Also, the icon TI is continuously displayed. Also, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

It should be noted that, in this variation (two variations before the look-ahead target), based on the result of the preliminary determination of the look-ahead target, even if the execution of the start-time effect production has been determined in advance, according to the start of this variation, the start-time No effect production is performed. Further, even if execution of the look-ahead chance effect is determined in advance in this variation, the look-ahead chance effect is not performed in this variation.

Next, at time t6, the production control section 130 returns to a state where it can receive commands from the main control section 100. FIG. Even in this case, the temporary stop (swing) of the three performance symbols 701 is continued, and the variable display of the small symbols 702 is also continuously executed. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 also continues the variable display. Further, the number of reservations indicated by the sub-first reservation display 83, the first reservation icon HA, and the first number reservation SHA remains "3". Also, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

After that, at time t7, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control section 130 receives the fluctuation stop command from the main control section 100 (FIG. 68(f)). In response to the reception of the change stop command, the three production patterns 701 are actually stopped, the small pattern 702 is stop-displayed, and the sub-first change display 81 is also stop-displayed. At this point, the number of reservations indicated by the sub-first reservation display 83, the first reservation icon HA, and the first number reservation SHA remains "3". Further, in response to the reception of the change stop command, the disappearing effect of the icon TI is executed. This effect of disappearing the icon TI is, as described above, effect in which the icon TI gradually disappears over a plurality of frames. Also, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

Then, at the next time t8, the first reservation number U1 is decreased from "2" to "1" in the main control unit 100, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started (FIG. 69(g)). . In other words, the previous change of the prefetch target is started. In addition, the production control unit 130 receives a variation start command from the main control unit 100, and in response to the reception of the variation start command, starts the operation production at the start using the production design 701, and uses the small design 702. start the variable display effect. Further, the variable display is started on the first sub-variable display 81 . Also, the number of reservations indicated by the first sub-reservation indicator 83 changes from "3" to "1" (the left LED turns on and the right LED turns off). Also, the pending number indicated by the first numeric pending SHA changes from "3" to "1". The change in the pending number indicated by this first digit pending SHA is done in one frame. That is, the first digit pending SHA is updated from "3" to "1" at the next frame update timing after receiving the variation start command. Also, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

Also, at time t8, one first pending icon HA disappears, and two first pending icons HA start shifting (FIG. 69(g)). In other words, one extra first pending icon HA among the three first pending icons HA displayed at this time disappears, and the remaining two first pending icons HA are shifted.

Next, at time t9, the start effect production for each production pattern 701 is executed (FIG. 69(h)). Here, based on the result of pre-determination for the pre-reading target, it was determined in advance to execute the start effect production as the pre-reading continuous production in the previous change of the pre-reading target, so the start effect production is executed. be.

Then, at time t10, the action effect at the start ends, and the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 is executed (Fig. 69(i)). After that, the production proceeds as described above.

In addition, in FIG. 69(g), when one extra first pending icon HA is erased and the remaining two first pending icons HA are shifted, the first pending icon farthest from the icon display area 704 is displayed. The icon HA may disappear, or the first pending icon HA closest to the icon display area 704 may disappear.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an effect example in which, when one extra first pending icon HA is displayed, the leftmost first pending icon HA3 is erased.

As shown in FIG. 70, in response to the reception of the change start command, the leftmost first pending icon HA3 disappears, and the remaining first pending icons HA2 and HA1 are replaced with the first pending icon HA1 and icon TI. Movement to each display area is started (FIG. 70(g)). The leftmost first pending icon HA3 is erased in one frame and is not displayed in the next frame (FIG. 70(g-2)). That is, in this case, the disappearing effect of gradually disappearing the first pending icon HA3 over a plurality of frames is not performed. On the other hand, the movement of the remaining first pending icons HA2 and HA1 is performed by the above-described normal icon movement display effect (icon movement executed in response to receiving a variation start command without missing a command from the main control unit 100). display effect). That is, the first pending icons HA2 and HA1 are moved by animation over a plurality of frames (eg, 15 frames; 0.5 seconds). Then, the first pending icons HA2 and HA1 are displayed as the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI respectively after a plurality of frames (FIG. 70(g-3)).

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an effect example in which the rightmost first pending icon HA1 is erased when one extra first pending icon HA is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 71, in response to the reception of the change start command, the rightmost first pending icon HA1 disappears (FIG. 71(g)), and the remaining first pending icons HA3 and HA2 are respectively placed in the first pending state. It is instantaneously (in one frame) moved to the display area of the icons HA2 and HA1 (FIG. 71(g-2)). That is, in response to the reception of the change start command, the rightmost first pending icon HA1 disappears in one frame, and the remaining first pending icons HA3 and HA2 are displayed in the display areas of the first pending icons HA2 and HA1 respectively. move by frame. In other words, the disappearance effect of gradually disappearing the rightmost first pending icon HA1 over a plurality of frames is not performed, and the icon movement display effect of moving the first pending icons HA3 and HA2 over a plurality of frames is not performed. Furthermore, after that, the instantaneously moved first pending icons HA2 and HA1 are moved to the display areas of the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI respectively by an icon movement display effect (animation over a plurality of frames) (Fig. 71 (g -3)).

In both the case shown in FIG. 70 and the case shown in FIG. 71, when the redundant first pending icon HA is eliminated, a disappearing effect is performed to eliminate the redundant first pending icon HA over a plurality of frames. may In this case, the extra first pending icon HA may be extinguished in a shorter time (that is, in a smaller number of frames) than the icon extinguishing effect executed in response to the normal reception of the fluctuation stop command. However, the redundant first pending icon HA may disappear in the same time (ie, in the same number of frames).

In the case shown in FIG. 71, the remaining first suspended icons HA3 and HA2 may be moved in a plurality of frames instead of moving to the display areas of the first suspended icons HA2 and HA1 in one frame. good. That is, the remaining first pending icons HA3 and HA2 may be moved by the icon movement display effect over a plurality of frames. In this case, the moving speed from the first reserved icons HA3 and HA2 to the first reserved icons HA2 and HA1 may be faster than the moving speed in the normal icon moving display effect. That is, when the pending icon is not displayed in the normal position because the command from the main control unit 100 was not received normally, when returning each pending icon to the normal position, the normal icon movement display effect is performed. may also move the hold icon in a short time. Note that the moving speed from the first reserved icons HA3 and HA2 to the first reserved icons HA2 and HA1 when the command from the main control unit 100 is not normally received is the same as the moving speed in the normal icon moving display effect. It's okay.

In the case shown in FIG. 71, after moving the remaining first suspended icons HA3 and HA2 to the display areas of the first suspended icons HA2 and HA1 (in one frame or a plurality of frames), The suspended icons HA2 and HA1 may be moved to the display areas of the first suspended icon HA1 and the icon TI at a faster speed (that is, in a shorter time) than the normal icon movement display effect.

Thus, when there is an inconsistency between the first reservation number U1 managed by the main control unit 100 and the reservation number of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol managed by the effect control unit 130, fluctuation starts Upon receipt of the command, the mismatch is resolved. The pending number indicated by the sub-first pending indicator 83 and the first numeric pending SHA changes instantaneously to a normal value.

On the other hand, with respect to the first pending icon HA, if the first pending icon HA is displayed excessively, the excessively displayed first pending icon HA disappears. Specifically, the number obtained by subtracting the first pending number (U1) stored in the main control unit 100 at this point from the number (HA_N) of the currently displayed first pending icon HA is further added to "1". subtracted ("HA_N−U1−1") disappears, and the remaining (U1+1) first pending icons HA are moved and displayed by the icon moving display effect.

When the first pending icon HA is extinguished, the first pending icon HA may be extinguished instantaneously in one frame, or may be extinguished by animation over a plurality of frames. When the first pending icon HA is extinguished by animation, the first pending icon HA may be extinguished in a shorter time than the extinguishing effect of the icon TI described above.

Here, when the first pending icon HA is displayed in a special mode, the production control unit 130 becomes unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100, so that the number of reservations and production control in the main control unit 100 If there is an inconsistency with the number of reservations in the unit 130, and if the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the first reservation icon HA of the special mode has not ended, the special symbol will be displayed even after the inconsistency is resolved. Aspects are maintained. For example, immediately before time t8 (FIG. 68(f)), if the first pending icon HA3 is displayed in blue, at time t8, in a relatively short time (one frame or a plurality of frames) The rightmost first reserved icon HA1 disappears, and at the same time, the remaining blue first reserved icon HA3 and white first reserved icon HA2 are displayed in the display areas of the first reserved icon HA2 and the first reserved icon HA1, respectively. It moves in a relatively short time (one frame or several frames). Then, the blue first pending icon HA2 and the white blue first pending icon HA1 are moved rightward by icon movement display effect (animation over a plurality of frames), and the first pending icon HA1 (blue ) and the icon TI (white), respectively.

Also, for example, when the first pending icon HA3 is displayed in a special mode, the effect control unit 130 becomes unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100, and this state continues. In this case, according to the lapse of time, the main control unit 100 terminates the variation of the current special symbol and starts the variation of the next special symbol. Further, when time elapses, in the main control unit 100, all the fluctuations of the special symbols that were suspended when the production control unit 130 became unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 are terminated. During this time, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 701 is continuously oscillated and the small symbol 702 is continuously displayed, and the first pending icon HA3 is continuously displayed in the special mode. Also, the first pending icons HA2, HA1 and the icon TI are continuously displayed, and the first numeric pending SHA is maintained as "3". Also, the variable display is continued on the sub-first variable display 81, and the pending number indicated by the sub-first pending display 83 is maintained as "3". After that, when four game balls enter the first starting port 45, the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and three variations of the first special symbol are suspended. At this time, the first reserved number U1 in the main control unit 100 and the reserved number of the first special symbols in the effect control unit 130 match. In this state, when the production control unit 130 returns to a state in which it can receive commands from the main control unit 100, the production control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 100 next. In response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, the effect symbol 701 is actually stopped and the small symbol 702 is stopped, and the icon TI disappears. Then, according to the next start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the first reserved icon HA3 in the special mode is moved by the icon movement display effect and displayed as the first reserved icon HA2. That is, the first pending icon HA in the special mode displayed before the effect control unit 130 becomes unable to receive the command from the main control unit 100 is a special symbol corresponding to the first pending icon HA in the special mode. Even if the fluctuation of is completed, if the number of reservations at the time of returning to the state where the command from the main control unit 100 can be received matches (matches) between the main control unit 100 and the production control unit 130, return maintained even after In this case, the display mode of the first pending icon HA does not reflect an accurate prefetch result. That is, even when the first pending icon HA is displayed in a display mode with a high expectation of a big win, even if the display mode of the first pending icon HA is changed, the effect with a high expectation is displayed. It is not performed, and it may become a change that is usually lost.

In another embodiment, when the first pending icon HA is displayed in a special mode, the effect control unit 130 cannot receive commands from the main control unit 100, so that the main control unit 100 When a mismatch occurs between the number of reservations and the number of reservations in the effect control unit 130, when the mismatch is resolved, the first reservation icon HA may be in the normal mode. For example, immediately before time t8 (FIG. 68(f)), if the first pending icon HA3 is displayed in blue, at time t8, in a relatively short time (one frame or a plurality of frames) The redundant leftmost blue first pending icon HA3 disappears, and at the same time, the remaining white first pending icons HA2 and HA1 are moved rightward by an icon movement display effect (animation over a plurality of frames). , the first pending icon H1 and the corresponding icon TI. Even when the remaining first pending icons HA2 and HA1 are displayed in the special mode, they may be changed to the normal mode when the extra first pending icon HA3 disappears.

In addition, when the actual number of first reserved symbols U1 of the first special symbol is larger than the number of currently displayed first reserved icons HA, these are matched in response to the reception of the variation start command. controlled. Specifically, the number obtained by subtracting the first pending number (U1) stored in the main control unit 100 at this time from the number (HA_N) of the currently displayed first pending icon HA is less than "1". , the number of the first pending icons HA is insufficient, so the number of the first pending icons HA is increased. For example, when only the first pending icon HA1 is displayed and the first pending number U1 included in the change start command is "2", the first pending icons HA3 and HA2 are additionally displayed to be insufficient A minute icon is added. Then, the additionally displayed first pending icons HA3 and HA2 are moved to the display areas of the first pending icons HA2 and HA1, respectively, and the first pending icon HA1 is moved to the display area of the icon TI. When the deficient first reserved icons HA3 and HA2 are additionally displayed, they are added in a smaller number of frames (i.e., in a shorter time) than the icon addition display effect performed when the game ball enters the normal starting opening. It may be displayed, or may be additionally displayed with the same number of frames (that is, at the same time).

In the above, after the production control unit 130 cannot receive commands from the main control unit 100 during the variable display of the special symbols, it returns to a state where commands can be received across the stop and start of variation of the special symbols. I explained the case. When the effect control unit 130 receives the variation start command in response to the start of variation of the special symbol, and then receives the next variation start command without receiving the variation stop command, the following control is performed.

That is, just before receiving the fluctuation start command, as shown in FIG. 68(d), the production pattern 701 temporarily stops (swings), the small pattern 702 executes the fluctuation display production, and the sub-first fluctuation display device 81 is executing the variable display. Also, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

In response to receiving the variation start command in this state, the icon TI disappears. This disappearance of the icon TI is (instantaneously) performed in one frame. Note that the disappearance of the icon TI may be performed by an animation having a plurality of frames. For example, the disappearance of the icon TI in response to reception of the change start command may be performed by an animation with fewer frames than the effect of disappearance of the icon TI executed upon normal reception of the change stop command. . Also, the disappearance of the icon TI in response to the reception of the change start command may be performed by the disappearance effect of the icon TI, which is executed when the change stop command is normally received.

In addition, in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command, the start operation production using the production pattern 701 is started. At this time, the production pattern 701 starts the start-time action production from the temporarily stopped state without going through the main stop.

In addition, in response to the reception of the variable start command, the small pattern 702 executes variable display effect without being stopped. That is, the small pattern 702 executes (continues) the variable display effect from the state in which the variable display effect is being performed without going through the stop display.

Further, in response to receiving the variable start command, the sub-first variable display 81 performs variable display without stopping display. That is, the first sub-variable display device 81 executes (continues) the variable display from the state of performing the variable display without going through the stop display.

Also, in response to the reception of the variation start command, the first pending icon HA is between the first pending number U1 in the main control unit 100 and the first special symbol pending number (N1) in the effect control unit 130 as described above. If there is an inconsistency in , after disappearing and instantaneous movement in one frame (or short-time movement in a plurality of frames), shift movement is performed by icon movement display effect.

In the above description, an example of the effect when the effect control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100 during execution of the look-ahead continuous effect (zone effect) has been described. But it's the same.

Also, in the above, the case where the command cannot be received during the execution of the normal losing variation (variation pattern HP1 or HP2) has been described, but the reach variation (for example, the variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect Similarly, even if the command cannot be received during execution of the variation pattern corresponding to ), the variation effect is continued. For example, when a variable production is executed according to a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach production, the production progresses to the N reach production, the SP reach production, and the SPSP reach production as the time elapses, and as a result of the SPSP reach production , three production patterns 701 are temporarily stopped, and whether or not a big hit is notified. When the production control unit 130 does not receive the fluctuation stop command, the temporary stop period of the three production patterns 701 indicating the loss or the big hit is extended, and the fluctuation display of the small patterns 702 and the sub-first fluctuation display. The period of the 81 variable display is also extended. In this case, the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped according to the end of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (temporary stop of the three effect symbols 701), and is not output during this extension period. Then, in response to receiving the next variation stop command, the effect symbol 701 is actually stopped, and the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variation display 81 are also stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that in the above-described embodiment, after the command from the main control unit 100 becomes unreceivable state, when it becomes receivable state, the number of reservations managed by the main control unit 100, the effect control unit If there was an inconsistency with the pending number managed by 130, it was controlled to eliminate these inconsistencies in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command. Alternate embodiments may be controlled to resolve these inconsistencies in response to receipt of a start variability command. Specifically, the effect control unit 130, based on the number of first reservations and the number of second reservations included in the variation start command, determines whether inconsistency has occurred, and if inconsistency has occurred, the shortage Add a minute pending icon, erase an extra pending icon, update the first numeric pending SHA or second numeric pending SHB, or change the sub first pending display 83 or sub second pending display 84. update the display.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130 cannot normally receive the command from the main control unit 100, even if the special design is stopped and displayed, the production design 701 swings while being temporarily stopped. do. As a result, it is possible to keep informing the player of the result of the big hit determination.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 cannot normally receive the command from the main control unit 100, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect, and the sub-th 1 fluctuation display 81 continues the fluctuation display. As a result, the expectations of the player can be maintained. In addition, since the small pattern 702 and the sub-first variation display 81 continue the variation display for a long period of time, it is possible to make the player aware of the abnormal state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 cannot normally receive the command from the main control unit 100, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is continuously displayed without disappearing. be. As a result, the expectations of the player can be maintained. In addition, since the icon TI remains displayed for a long time, the player can be made aware of the abnormal state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the production control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100 normally, the variable production during execution (variation display production of production pattern 701, pre-stop operation production, The advance notice effect, the ready-to-win effect, etc.) are continuously performed, and the look-ahead effect (for example, the zone effect) is also executed. As a result, the expectations of the player can be maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the production control unit 130 can not normally receive the command from the main control unit 100, when it returns to the receivable state, according to the next variation start command, production design A variable production using 701 is executed, and a look-ahead production (start-time effect production) whose execution has been determined in advance in the variation is also executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a change stop command is received while a predetermined effect is being executed (for example, while the icon TI is being displayed), the predetermined effect is terminated (the icon TI is extinguished), If the variation stop command is not received, the predetermined effect is continued, and if the next command (next variation start command) is received, the predetermined effect being executed is terminated, and another effect (new icon). That is, on the premise that the predetermined effect is terminated in response to receiving the first command during execution of the predetermined effect, and another effect is executed in response to receiving the second command, the first command Even if the second command is received without receiving the command, the predetermined performance is terminated and another performance is executed. Thereby, even if the first command is not received, the effect can be executed while maintaining consistency by receiving the second command.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation start command corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol targeted for prefetching is not received, during the variation of the special symbol targeted for prefetching, a variation production (for example, production symbol 701 is used During the variation of the special symbol, even if the start operation effect, the variable display effect, the variable display of the small symbol 702, the variable display of the sub-first variable display 81, the movement of the first pending icon, etc.) are not executed. A look-ahead effect can be executed. As a result, the expectation of the player can be maintained even if the variable performance cannot be executed.

It should be noted that, when executing the look-ahead effect without executing the variable effect, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed. In addition, as aspects of the look-ahead effect, there are a look-ahead display (zone display image 707) and a look-ahead sound (zone BGM). changes step by step (for example, a change from a horizontally long zone display image 707 to a vertically long zone display image 707, a change in the color of the zone display image 707, a change from an image showing a weak zone to an image showing a strong zone, etc. ) is possible, but the output mode of the look-ahead sound may change when the display mode for look-ahead changes, and the output mode may not change.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a look-ahead continuous effect over the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol is received, a fluctuation production (operation at the start of the production pattern 701 Effect, variable display effect, etc.) is executed, and a look-ahead continuous effect (for example, effect effect at the start) is executed, but if the variable start command is not received, the variable effect and during the variable display of the special symbol Execution of the look-ahead continuous effect is regulated (suppressed). Even if the execution of the fluctuation production and the look-ahead continuous production is regulated (suppressed), if the fluctuation start command corresponding to the start of the next special symbol fluctuation is received, the regulated (suppressed) look-ahead continuous production (at the start effect production). Thereby, even when the variation start command cannot be received, the look-ahead continuous effect can be executed, and the player can expect.

Also, in the present embodiment, if the variation start command is not received in response to the start of variation of the special symbol and the variation effect is not executed, the first look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect, first 1 effect using the pending icon HA) is executed, but the second look-ahead effect (for example, effect effect at start, look-ahead chance effect) is not executed. As a result, even if the variation start command cannot be received, the executable pre-reading effect can be executed, and the player can expect it.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is not received during the temporary stop of the three production patterns 701, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 701 is extended, and the BGM is played even during the extension of the temporary stop period. is continuously output. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is normally received, the BGM is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the stop display of the special symbol, and the BGM is stopped after the elapse of the predetermined time. do. On the other hand, when the fluctuation stop command is not received normally, the BGM is continued without stopping even after a predetermined time has passed since the stop display of the special design (the extension start of the temporary stop period of the three production designs 701). output. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is not received during the fluctuation display effect of the small pattern 702 (or the sub first fluctuation display device 81), the fluctuation display effect of the small pattern 702 is extended. To continuously output BGM even during extension of variable display presentation. As a result, the performance can be continued.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change stop command is not received during the display of the icon TI, the display of the icon TI is extended, and the BGM is continued even during the extension of the display of the icon TI. output. As a result, the performance can be continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation stop command is not received in the normal losing variation, the temporary stop period of the three performance symbols 701 is extended, and the BGM is continuously output during this extension period. For example, if normal BGM is being output, normal BGM output is continued, and if zone BGM is being output, zone BGM output is continued. On the other hand, for example, in SPSP reach fluctuation and SP reach fluctuation, when the fluctuation stop command is not received, the temporary stop period of the three production patterns 701 is extended, but during this extension period SPSP reach BGM and SP Do not continuously output reach BGM. Thereby, even if the variation stop command cannot be received, the performance can be continued in the case of the normal loss variation, while, for example, when the SP ready-to-win performance is performed, the SP ready-to-win performance is substantially finished. It is possible to make the player recognize that he or she is doing so, and to prevent the player from sustaining excessive expectations.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect), if the fluctuation stop command is not received during the temporary stop of the three production patterns 701, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 701 is extended, and the look-ahead performance being executed is continued even during the extension of the temporary stop period. As a result, the look-ahead effect can be continued, and the expectation of the player can be maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect) is being executed and a variation stop command is not received during the variable display effect of the small pattern 702 (or the first sub-variation indicator 81) extends the execution period of the variable display of the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first variable display 81), and continues the prefetch effect being executed even during this extended period. As a result, the look-ahead effect can be continued, and the expectation of the player can be maintained.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect) is being executed and the change stop command is not received during the display of the icon TI, the display period of the icon TI is extended, The look-ahead effect being executed is continued even during this extension period. As a result, the look-ahead effect can be continued, and the expectation of the player can be maintained.

In the extension period of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 701, the extension period of the variable display effect of the small symbol 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI, the stage of the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is not changed. For example, if the zone effect is being executed, the mode of the zone effect is not changed from the weak zone to the strong zone. Also, when the first pending icon HA is displayed in the first special mode (eg, blue), it is not changed to the second special mode (eg, red). This makes it possible to control the look-ahead effect.

In addition, during the extension period of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701, the extension period of the variable display effect of the small symbol 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI, there is an opportunity to change the stage of the effect mode of the look-ahead effect. A new opportunity effect (a effect that makes the player expect that the effect mode of the look-ahead effect changes (or that possibility)) is not executed. This can prevent the player from expecting too much.

In addition, it is possible to output BGM (zone BGM) for pre-reading effect even during the extension period of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701, the extension period of the variable display effect of the small symbol 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI. is. As a result, the continuation of the look-ahead effect can be appealed to the player, and the amusement can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation stop command is normally received, the icon TI disappearing effect is performed by animation over a plurality of frames in response to the reception of the variation stop command. On the other hand, if the icon TI continues to be displayed without receiving the change stop command, and the next command (the next change stop command, the next change start command, or the customer waiting command) is received, the icon A TI is erased in a relatively short time (eg, one frame). That is, the disappearance period of the icon TI when the next command is received without receiving the fluctuation stop command is shorter than the disappearance period of the icon TI when the fluctuation stop command is normally received. As a result, when the change stop command is not normally received, the icon TI can be immediately erased.

In addition, the disappearance period of the icon TI when the next fluctuation start command (or fluctuation stop command) is received without normally receiving the fluctuation stop command, and the next customer waiting period without normally receiving the fluctuation stop command. The disappearance period of the icon TI when the command is received may be the same.

In addition, in the extended period of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701, the extended period of the variable display effect of the small symbol 702, and the extended period of the display of the icon TI, the advance notice effect ( Although the fixed effect) is not started, the advance notice effect started before the extension period is continued during the extension period. Further, before the extension period, the advance notice effect (fixed effect) can be executed at a plurality of timings, and may be continuously executed during the extension period regardless of the timing at which it is started. In addition, the notice effect (fixed effect) includes a first effect (for example, sound) and a second effect (light emission in a predetermined color). It may be possible to continue execution even during the extension period.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, it is possible to adjust the volume using the cross key 19 during the variable display of the special symbols. The used volume adjustment is suppressed (restricted). When the fluctuation stop command is not normally received during the temporary stop of the production pattern 701, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 701 is extended. Volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible during the extension of the temporary stop period. In addition, normal BGM or zone BGM is output even during the extension of this period, but BGM for SP reach and BGM for SPSP reach are not output during extension of this period.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variation stop command is not normally received during the variation display of the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first variation display 81), the variation display period of the small pattern 702 is extended. Volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible during the extension of the variable display period. In addition, normal BGM or zone BGM is output even during the extension of this period, but BGM for SP reach and BGM for SPSP reach are not output during extension of this period.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the change stop command is not normally received during display of the icon TI, the display period of the icon TI is extended. Volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible during the extension of the display period. In addition, normal BGM or zone BGM is output even during the extension of this period, but BGM for SP reach and BGM for SPSP reach are not output during extension of this period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is not normally received during the temporary stop of the production pattern 701, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 701 is extended, and then, when the next fluctuation start command is received. At this time, the production pattern 701 does not actually stop, and the variable production (operation production at the start) is started from the temporary stop position. Thereby, even if there is an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received, the normal performance can be restored.

Further, in the present embodiment, the next fluctuation start command is received during the extension period of the fluctuation display of the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first fluctuation display 81) due to the fact that the fluctuation stop command is not normally received. In this case, the small pattern 702 (or the first sub-variation display 81) does not stop and continues the variation display. Thereby, even if there is an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received, the normal performance can be restored.

Further, in this embodiment, when the next variation start command is received while the display period of the icon TI is being extended due to the fact that the variation stop command is not normally received, the icon TI is erased (for example, 1 frame), and thereafter, the first pending icon HA1 is moved and the icon TI is displayed by the icon movement display effect. Thereby, even if there is an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received, the normal performance can be restored.

Also, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 701 due to the fact that the fluctuation stop command was not normally received during the temporary stop of the production pattern 701, the production control unit 130 receives the power-on command from the main control unit 100. In this case, the effect pattern 701 is rendered invisible and a power-on image is displayed.

In addition, during the extension period of the fluctuation display of the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first fluctuation display 81) due to the fact that the fluctuation stop command was not received normally, the power-on command from the main control unit 100 is issued by the production control unit If received by 130, it renders the small symbol 702 invisible and causes a power up image.

Further, when the presentation control unit 130 receives the power-on command from the main control unit 100 during the extension of the display period of the icon TI due to the normal reception of the change stop command, the icon TI becomes invisible. Enable and let the power-on image.

In addition, in the present embodiment, due to the fact that the command from the main control unit 100 was not received normally, the number of reservations in the production control unit 130 ( When the number of the first pending icon HA, the number of the first numeric pending SHA, etc. ("HA_N" here) increases, the surplus (HA_N-U1-1) ) are not shifted, but the necessary number of (U1+1) first reserved icons are shifted. Thereby, even if there is an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received, the normal performance can be restored.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the look-ahead effect, by not normally receiving the command from the main control unit 100, the first pending number U1 stored in the main control unit 100 and the effect control unit 130 If there is a discrepancy with the number of reservations of the first special symbol (the number of the first reservation icon HA, the number of the first number reservation SHA, etc.), during the execution of the variation effect in response to the reception of the next variation start command , it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect. In addition, when the next variation start command is received, the prefetch effect being executed may be ended.

(Display example when the power is cut off during the variable display of special symbols)
Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the power supply is shut off during variable display of special symbols. Below, the case where the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the first reserved number U1 is "1" will be described.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the power supply is interrupted during the variable display of the first special symbol. 73 to 75 are diagrams showing an example of display at each timing in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72, at time t0, the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the effect symbol 701 is being variably displayed, and the small symbol 702 and the first sub-variable indicator 81 are also being variably displayed. It is inside (Fig. 73(a)). Further, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1", and the reserved number indicated by the sub first reservation display 83 is also "1". In addition, a special mode (blue) first pending icon HA1 is displayed, and the icon TI is also displayed. Also, the first digit reserved SHA is "1". A background image is normally displayed as the background image, and BGM is normally output.

Next, assume that the power is cut off at time t1. When the power is cut off, all the LEDs of the main information display 59 including the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reserve display 63 are extinguished, the sub first variation display 81 and the sub first reserve. All the LEDs of the sub information display 80 including the display 83 are also extinguished. Also, the first image display device 70 stops operating (FIG. 73(c)). Even if the power is cut off, the information stored in the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100 is maintained for a certain period of time (for example, 24 hours).

After the lapse of a predetermined time from time t1, the power is restored without performing the setting change operation or the RWM clear operation, and the above-described initial setting process is performed, so that at time t2, the variable display of the first special symbol and the first special Assume that the display of the symbol holding display 63 resumes. Here, the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed from the state immediately before the power was cut off.

That is, just before the time t1 when the power is cut off (for example, 1 ms before the power cut), for example, when the third and fourth LEDs from the left of the first special symbol display 60 are lit (FIG. 73 (b)), when the LED of the first special symbol indicator 60 lights up for the first time after the power is restored at time t2, the third and fourth LEDs from the left light up (FIG. 73(d)). As described above, each LED of the first special symbol display 60 changes its lighting state every 32 milliseconds. If the power is cut off 32 milliseconds after the 3rd and 4th LEDs light up, the 4th and 5th LEDs will light up first after the power is restored.

At time t2 when the variable display of the first special symbol resumes, the first image display device 70 includes the effect symbol 701, the small symbol 702, the pending icon, the icon, the first number pending SHA, and the second number pending SHB. A game-related effect image is not displayed (FIG. 73(d)). In this case, an image indicating that the gaming machine 1 is being activated may be displayed.

After that, at time t3, a power restoration image corresponding to the power restoration command from the main control unit 100 is displayed (the left diagram in FIG. 74(e)). Here, the power restoration command includes information for identifying whether the player is waiting for a customer, is displaying a variable special symbol, or is playing a jackpot game. In addition to the power restoration command, the main control unit 100 transmits a command indicating the current gaming state, the first reserved number U1, and the second reserved number U2. Images are generated based on these commands.

Specifically, as shown in the diagram on the right side of FIG. 74(e), the background image corresponding to the gaming state, the predetermined three production patterns 701 and small patterns 702, and the number corresponding to the first pending number U1 The effect image including the first pending icon HA, the image of the first pending number SHA corresponding to the first pending number U1, and the image of the second pending number SHB corresponding to the second pending number U2 is generated by the image sound control unit. Generated internally at 140 .

Even during the variable display of the first special symbol, the predetermined three production symbols 701 and the small symbols 702 are stopped. Also, regardless of the symbols that were displayed before the power was turned off, a predetermined fixed combination of three performance symbols (for example, "123") is drawn. In any effect mode, a predetermined fixed combination of three effect symbols (for example, "123") is drawn. For example, in the normal game state, among a plurality of production modes A to C (stages A to C), a predetermined production mode (for example, production mode A) is set, and the production pattern of the display mode according to the predetermined production mode. is drawn. In addition, in the probability variable gaming state, the production pattern of the display mode according to the production mode D is drawn. In any production mode, the combination of the three production symbols at the time of power restoration is a combination of common numbers ("123").

Also, the number of the first pending icons HA is the same as before the power shutdown, but the display mode is the normal mode. That is, the first pending icon HA1, which was displayed in the special mode before the power was turned off, is displayed in the normal mode after the power is restored. Also, the first pending icon HA1 performs the above-described periodic action. Also, the icon is not displayed (generated) in the internally generated effect image. Also, the background image is a background image corresponding to the game state. The layers (priority order) of the images such as the background image, the production pattern 701, and the pending icon are the same as the layers in the normal game. 701 and the like are arranged.

A power restoration image corresponding to the power restoration command is arranged in a layer on the front side of the generated effect image, and the power restoration image is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see the left side of FIG. 74(e)). figure). That is, the effect image including the generated effect symbol 701 and the like is not displayed on the first image display device 70 and is not visually recognized by the player. The power restoration image is an image indicating that the power has been restored, and is an image for making the player wait until a normal effect image including the effect symbol 701 or the like is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74(e), while the power restoration image is being displayed, the variable display (blinking of the LED) using the sub-first variable display 81 is not performed. On the other hand, while the power restoration image is being displayed, the sub-first reservation display 83 is displayed according to the first reservation number U1. That is, since the first reservation number U1 is "1" here, the LED on the left side of the two LEDs of the sub-first reservation display 83 is lit, and the first reservation number related to the first special symbol It indicates that U1 is "1". Since the second pending number U2 is "0", the two LEDs of the sub second pending display 84 are turned off, and the second number pending SHB in the internally generated effect image is also "0". becomes.

While this power recovery image is being displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol continues, and the game itself is in progress. For example, at time t4, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 in the main control unit 100 changes to "2", and the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol is suspended.

In response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45, the display of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes to "2" and the first number reservation SHA also changes to "2" (FIG. 74 ( f)). A first pending icon HA is also added. Specifically, an icon additional display effect (additional display animation) of the first pending icon HA2 is performed. Since the power restoration image is superimposed on the frontmost layer, the added first pending icon HA2 is invisible to the player at this point. Also, the first pending icon HA2 to be added is added in a special mode when it is determined in the icon change effect determination process that it is added in a special mode. Here, it is assumed that the first pending icon HA2 is added in the normal mode. Note that a prize winning sound may be output in accordance with the winning of the starting port. By outputting the winning sound, the player can be made to recognize that the starting port has won a prize even if the icon addition display effect of the first pending icon HA2 cannot be visually recognized. Also, the player can be made to recognize the display mode of the added first pending icon HA by the winning sound.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed at time t5, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (FIG. 74(g)). The period in which the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off is not counted as the fluctuation time of the special symbols. Therefore, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the remaining variation time of the first special symbol at time t1 has elapsed after the variable display is resumed at time t3.

In accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol, at time t6, the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command. The power restoration image is erased in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, and the effect image including the effect symbol 701, the small symbol 702, the first pending icon HA, etc. is displayed on the first image display device 70 (FIG. 75 ( h)).

Next, at time t7, the variable display of the first special symbol is started (FIG. 75(i)). At this point, the effect control unit 130 has not received the variation start command from the main control unit 100, and the effect symbol 701, the small symbol 702, etc. are still displayed.

Next, at time t8, in response to the fact that the production control unit 130 receives the first special symbol variation start command, the start operation production using the production design 701, the fluctuation display of the small design 702, the sub-first fluctuation A variable display using the display 81 is started (FIG. 75(j)). Further, the icon moving display effect of the first pending icon HA is started, and the display of the sub-first pending display 83 and the first numeric pending display SHA is decreased from "2" to "1".

In this way, when the power of the game machine 1 is interrupted during the variable display of the special symbols and then restored, the game is progressed while the power recovery image is displayed until the special symbols during variation are stopped and displayed. Then, in response to the stop display of the special symbol, the power restoration image is erased and the normal effect image including the effect symbol 701 and the like is displayed. At the time of power restoration, a power restoration command, a command indicating the number of pending games, and a command indicating a game state are transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130 . Based on these commands, the effect control unit 130 recognizes that the power supply has been restored during the variable display of the special symbols, the number of pending games, and the game state, and generates and displays an image corresponding thereto.

Specifically, when the power is restored, the power restoration image is displayed, and even while the power restoration image is being displayed, the hold icon is drawn in the lower layer. However, the pending icon is made invisible by the power restoration image. In addition, when the suspension of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol (suspension of the variation of the special symbol) increases while the power restoration image is displayed, the suspension icon corresponding to the increase is also drawn, but it is invisible due to the power restoration image. becomes. Also, during the display of the power recovery image, even if the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 are drawn while stopped, but become invisible due to the power recovery image.

Further, when the power is interrupted while the suspended icon is displayed in the special mode and then restored, the image of the suspended icon in the normal mode is drawn. The power restoration image is drawn on top of that layer and the hold icon in normal mode is not visible. Then, at a predetermined timing (the timing of the stop display of the special symbol), the power recovery image is erased and the normal mode suspension icon is displayed.

Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the starting hole while the power restoration image is being displayed, a special pending icon may be additionally drawn based on the result of the preliminary determination. The power restoration image is drawn on top of it and the special mode hold icon is not visible. Then, at a predetermined timing (the timing of the stop display of the special symbol), the power recovery image is erased and the special mode pending icon is displayed.

Further, when a game ball wins in the starting hole while the power recovery image is being displayed, a holding icon is additionally drawn and a winning sound is output. Thereby, the suspended icon to be added is drawn in the lower layer of the power restoration image, and even if it cannot be visually recognized, the player can easily recognize that the start opening has been won. Further, when the added pending icon is a special mode pending icon, a winning sound corresponding to the special mode may be output. In this case, even if the suspended icon is invisible, the player can be made to recognize that the suspended icon of the special mode has been added.

Further, even while the power restoration image is being displayed, the suspension icon is drawn and the suspension icon is caused to perform the periodic operation. As a result, even when the power restoration image is shifted to the normal effect image, the effect can be started smoothly.

By such control, when erasing the power restoration image (at the time of stop display of special symbols), the effect image corresponding to the current state (game state, number of reservations, fluctuation state of special symbols, etc.) is immediately displayed. You can resume the production smoothly at the start of the next special pattern fluctuation. In addition, by displaying the power recovery image until the current special symbol is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as compared with the case where the effect symbol 701 is displayed while the power is restored. That is, when the variable display of the production pattern 701 is executed at the time of power restoration, it is necessary to accurately determine what kind of production is executed at what timing, and the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the production pattern 701 If the timing of the presentation using , does not match, the player will be confused. Such a situation can be prevented by displaying the power restoration image until the current special symbol is changed.

In the above embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command, the power recovery image is erased and the normal effect image including the effect symbol 701 is displayed. Such control may be performed according to another command instead of the fluctuation stop command. For example, in response to the effect control unit 130 receiving the next variation start command, the power restoration image may be erased and the normal effect image may be displayed. Also, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the power restoration image may be erased and a normal effect image may be displayed.

Further, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off while waiting for customers and then the power is restored, the power restoration image shown in FIG. After being displayed, a normal effect image is displayed. In this case, the three performance symbols 701 and the small symbols 702 are displayed in combination of predetermined fixed numbers.

Further, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off during the jackpot game and then restored, the power restoration image shown in FIG. After being displayed, an image relating to the effect during the jackpot game is displayed.

(Other features when power is restored and when power is turned on)
The game machine 1 of the present embodiment has the following features at the time of power recovery from power shutdown or power on.

For example, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power switch is pressed while the effect button 17 is pressed, store setting, RTC setting, eco mode setting, or debugging is performed before the gaming machine 1 becomes ready to play. A menu screen for starting in mode is displayed. The store setting is a setting for a game clerk to input store information. Also, the RTC setting is the setting of date and time. Also, the eco mode setting is a setting as to whether or not to set the eco mode for suppressing power consumption. When the effect control unit 130 receives a power-on command while such a menu screen is being displayed, the menu screen is rendered invisible and a power-on image is displayed. Further, when the effect control unit 130 receives a power restoration command while the menu screen is being displayed, the menu screen is rendered invisible and a power restoration image is displayed.

In addition, the first movable member 73a is movable in the first area, the second movable member 73b is movable in the second area overlapping the first area, and the first movable member 73b is movable in the second area overlapping the first area. The movable member 73a executes the first movable role object production moving from the initial position to the first production position overlapping the display area of the production pattern 701, and the second movable member 73b displays the production pattern 701 from the initial position. It is configured to execute a second movable role product performance that moves to a second performance position that overlaps with the area. The first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are normally on standby at the initial position. When the power is cut off while the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are waiting at the initial position, and then the power is restored, the power restoration image is displayed, and the first movable member 73a is restored from the initial position. and the initial operation of operating the second movable member 73b. If the power is interrupted while the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are operating, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b may not be at the initial positions when the power is restored. When the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are not in their initial positions at the time of power restoration, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are returned to their initial positions at different timings, and the power restoration image is displayed. display. After the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are returned to the initial positions, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are moved at different timings to the same production position and production as when the movable accessory production is executed. and then move to the initial position. During the initial operation, a power recovery image is displayed. By performing such control, it is possible to check the operation of a plurality of movable members whose movable ranges overlap each other, without causing the plurality of movable members to interfere with each other even if they are not in the initial positions when power is restored.

Further, suspension of the variation of the first special symbol is displayed using the first special symbol suspension display 63, the sub-first suspension display 83, and the first suspension icon HA. While the display mode of the first suspension icon HA can be changed, the display modes of the first special symbol suspension display device 63 and the sub-first suspension display device 83 cannot be changed. At the time of power restoration, the display of the first special symbol suspension display 63 and the sub-first suspension display 83 is resumed before the display of the first suspension icon HA is resumed. Similarly, regarding the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol, the second special symbol suspension display 64 and the sub-second suspension display 84 are displayed before the display of the second suspension icon HB is resumed when the power is restored. is displayed again. For this reason, it is possible to notify the number of reservations as early as possible when power is restored.

Further, while the power recovery image is being displayed, the volume value image (light amount value image) corresponding to the volume adjustment operation (or light amount adjustment operation) is also hidden. Similarly, when the game ball wins the starting hole while the power restoration image is being displayed, the volume value image (light amount value image) is not displayed. In this case, the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) itself may be possible according to the volume adjustment operation (or light amount adjustment operation). A volume value image (light amount image) corresponding to the volume adjustment operation (or light amount adjustment operation) is drawn internally, but may be made invisible by the power restoration image. Similarly, when the effect control unit 130 changes from a state in which it cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100 to a state in which it can receive a command from the main control unit 100 while the power restoration image is being displayed, the volume value image (light amount value image) is not displayed.

After the power supply is restored, the power restoration image is erased in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, but the display of the volume value image (light intensity value image) is suppressed (not displayed) for a predetermined period after the reception of the fluctuation stop command. is done). When there is a suspension of the variation of the special symbol, the volume value image (light amount image) is hidden until a predetermined period elapses from the reception of the next variation start command, and the operation effect at the start of the effect symbol 701 is performed. After that, the volume value image (light value image) can be displayed.

Also, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may have the following features.

Among a plurality of ready-to-win productions with different degrees of expectation for big hits, for the N-ready-to-win production with a low expectation, when the look-ahead production (zone production, start effect production, look-ahead chance production, icon change production) is executed, look-ahead The degree of expectation for a big hit in the N-reach production may be higher than in the case where the production is not executed. For example, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the expectation level of the N-reach effect is ``1%'', whereas when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expectation level of the N-reach effect is increased to ``5%''. You may let Further, when a specific read-ahead effect is executed out of a plurality of read-ahead effects, the expectation of a big hit of the N reach effect may be higher than when the specific read-ahead effect is not executed. With such a configuration, even in a ready-to-win effect with a low degree of expectation, the player can expect a big win when the look-ahead effect is executed. It should be noted that there may be a case where the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the N-reach effect and a case where the look-ahead effect is executed after the start of the N-reach effect. In this case, the former may have a higher (or lower) jackpot expectation than the latter. Incidentally, regarding the degree of expectation for a big hit in the SPSP ready-to-win production, such a change in the degree of expectation may or may not occur.

In addition, the execution ratio of each effect differs as follows between when it is determined as a big hit and when it is determined as a loss. Specifically, when it is determined to be a big hit, the ratio of executing N reach after executing the look-ahead effect is higher than the ratio of executing N reach without executing the look-ahead effect (for example, icon change effect). is configured to be high. Further, when it is determined as a big hit, the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win performance after executing the look-ahead performance is higher than the ratio of executing the N-ready-to-win performance after executing the look-ahead performance. there is In addition, when it is determined as a big hit, the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win performance after executing the look-ahead performance is higher than the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win performance after executing the look-ahead performance. there is On the other hand, when it is determined to be a failure, the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win effect after executing the look-ahead effect is lower than the ratio of executing the N-reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect. there is In addition, when it is determined as a failure, the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win performance after executing the look-ahead performance is lower than the ratio of executing the SP ready-to-win performance after executing the look-ahead performance. there is

In addition, the pending icon can change to any of blue, red, and gold, and the icon can similarly change to any of blue, red, and gold, and the icon can change from a predetermined color to a specific color ( For example, when the icon changes to Gold), it may be possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the SP ready-to-win effect will develop into an SP-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation than the SP ready-to-win effect. In this case, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the suggestive effect, but when the icon is of a specific color, the SPSP ready-to-win effect may be executed regardless of whether the suggestive effect is executed. It should be noted that the specific color changes while being displayed as a pending icon, and when the pending icon of the specific color is displayed as the icon, the suggestion effect may not be executed. In addition, even if the suggestive effect is easier to execute when the icon changes to a specific color while the icon is being displayed than when the pending icon changes to a specific color and is displayed as the icon. good.

Further, for example, during the variation of the special symbol by the variation pattern corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the icon is more likely to change before the N reach effect is executed than during the N reach effect. As a result, it is possible to expect a big hit before the start of the N reach performance, and to expect the development of the SP reach performance and the SP SP reach performance with a high expectation of the big win.

Further, the suspended icon and the icon can be changed at a plurality of timings, and the second period during which the icon can be changed is longer than the first period during which the suspended icon can be changed. In addition, in the variation in which the ready-to-reach production (N-reach production, SP-ready production, SPSP-ready production) is executed, the pending icon changes before the N-reach production starts than during the execution of the N-reach production. high probability to do so. As a result, the hold icon can be easily changed before the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the player's interest can be directed to the hold. In addition, after the ready-to-win effect is started, the pending icon becomes less likely to change, and conversely, the icon becomes more likely to change, so that the player's interest can be directed to the change (current change).

Further, the number of stages of display mode of the pending icon or the icon may differ depending on the presentation mode. For example, a first effect mode in which the pending icon can be displayed in a first stage number display mode (for example, blue, red, gold) and the first background image is displayed, and a second stage number There may also be a second presentation mode in which the pending icon can be displayed in a display mode (eg, blue, red, gold, rainbow) and a second background image is displayed. Also, before the icon change effect for changing the pending icon, it may be possible to execute an icon change suggestion effect (suggesting that the icon may change) that triggers the execution of the icon change effect. The content of the icon change suggestion effect may differ depending on which stage the pending icon changes to from among a plurality of stages of display modes. For example, the mode of the icon change suggestion effect when the color changes from blue to red may be different from the mode of the icon change suggestion effect when the color changes from blue to gold.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may perform a confirmation effect (confirmation effect indicating confirmation of a big win) suggesting that a jackpot game is executed during execution of the variable effect.

For example, as the confirmation effect, there is a case where a confirmation sound suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed is output. The confirmation sound is output regardless of the operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17.例文帳に追加A first notification performance pattern in which an operation promoting performance is executed after outputting a confirmation sound and a movable performance device 73 is operated in response to an operation on a performance button 17 to notify a big win, and an operation promotion without outputting a confirmation sound. There may also be a second notification effect pattern in which the effect is executed and the big win is notified by operating the movable effect device 73 according to the operation of the effect button 17 . In the case of executing the second notification effect pattern, no confirmation sound is output even after the movable effect device 73 is operated.

In addition, a first ready-to-reach performance pattern in which SP ready-to-reach performance is executed from N-reach performance and SP ready-to-reach performance is further executed, and a second ready-to-reach performance pattern to execute SP-ready-to-win performance without executing SP ready-to-reach performance from N ready-to-reach performance. A fixed effect can be executed in the case of executing the first ready-to-win effect pattern and the case of executing the second ready-to-win effect pattern, and the execution mode of the fixed effect is different for each pattern. You can let In addition, when an operation promotion performance prompting the operation of the performance button 17 is executed and the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period of the operation of the performance button 17 in the operation promotion performance, there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be performed. It may be possible to execute an advance notice effect suggesting something. Although the fixed effect can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable effect, the fixed effect may not be executed during the effective period of the operation.

In addition, when an operation promotion performance prompting the operation of the performance button 17 is executed and the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period of the operation of the performance button 17 in the operation promotion performance, there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be performed. It may be possible to execute a foretelling effect suggesting that there will be a game, and to execute a final effect accompanied by output of a final sound suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed. The execution ratio of the fixed production and/or the execution ratio of the advance notice production differs depending on whether the movable production device 73 is operated or not, and the fixed production can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable production. , During the effective period (during the operation prompting effect), the confirmation effect may not be executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the big win game will be executed and a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility that the big win game will be executed before the decision effect immediately before the notification of whether or not the big win is made. may be The suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than that of the first suggested effect, and the second suggested effect is executed more than the first suggested effect. is configured so that the movable effect device 73 can be easily operated. In addition, the possibility of a jackpot game being performed when the operation promoting performance for prompting the operation of the performance button 17 is executed, and the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period of the operation of the performance button 17 in the operation promoting performance. It is possible to execute the suggested production. When the ready-to-win performance is executed after the jackpot is determined, the operation-promoting performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance rather than the operation-promoting performance is executed before the ready-to-win performance is executed. The performance button 17 is likely to change to the projecting state in the operation prompting performance.

Further, when it is determined as a big hit, it is possible to select the first variation pattern of the first variation time, or the second variation pattern of the second variation time longer than the first variation time, and the first variation pattern is selected, the first fixed effect may be executed with a first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, the second fixed effect may be executed with a second probability. In the case of executing the second fixed production, the performance pattern of the first mode (the first size and the mode in which the character is added) is used to perform the action performance at the start, and during the execution of the predetermined performance A variable display effect is performed using the effect pattern of the second mode (second size smaller than the first size), and then the first mode or third mode (first size and character is added) The pre-stop action effect may be performed using the effect pattern of the mode that is not performed). On the other hand, when executing the first fixed effect, the pre-stop motion effect may be performed using the effect symbol of the first mode or the third mode without displaying the effect symbol of the second mode. Here, when the first fixed effect is executed, a jackpot game advantageous to the player may be performed more easily than when the second fixed effect is executed. Conversely, when the second fixed effect is executed, a jackpot game advantageous to the player may be more likely to be performed than when the first fixed effect is executed.

In addition, when the production control unit 130 can receive a command from the main control unit 100, the swing period of the production pattern 701 in the fluctuation in which the loss is notified as a result of the reach production (reach loss fluctuation) is the fluctuation in which the big hit is notified. It is longer than the swing period of the production pattern 701 in (big hit fluctuation). When the production control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100, the swinging period of the production pattern 701 in the reach-losing fluctuation may be shorter than the swinging period of the production pattern 701 in the big hit fluctuation. .

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the following features. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which the special symbols stop after a plurality of cycle variations, the effect symbols perform the start action effect (movement in a predetermined direction or character action) at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. Start. Specifically, after the first cycle variation is completed, the production pattern starts the action production at the start (movement in a predetermined direction or action of the character).

Also, in a gaming machine in which the special symbols stop after a plurality of cycle variations, the variation display using the small symbols and the sub-first variation display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. Specifically, after the first unit change (the first lighting of the LED) in the first cycle fluctuation is finished, the fluctuation display using the small symbols and the first sub-variation display is started.

In addition, in a gaming machine in which special symbols stop after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the update (decrease display) of the pending display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. Specifically, the shift movement (movement animation) of the pending icon is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. Also, after the first unit change (the first lighting of the LED) in the first cycle variation ends, the shift movement (movement animation) of the pending icon ends, thereby completing the update of the pending display.

Also, in a gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle variations, the change from the reserved icon to the icon is started at a timing different from the cycle variation start timing. Also, after the first unit change (the first lighting of the LED) in the first cycle variation is finished, the change from the pending icon to the icon is finished.

In addition, in a gaming machine in which special symbols stop after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, a game sound (e.g., BGM, fluctuation start sound, other notice sound for notifying the result of jackpot determination) is generated at a timing different from the cycle fluctuation start timing. starts audible output of

Also, in a gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the background effect using the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. In addition, the background effect using the background image is executed before the start of the cycle variation for the first time and during the execution of the cycle variation.

Also, in a gaming machine in which the special symbols stop after a plurality of cycle variations, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation. Before the final cycle variation of the special symbols is completed, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Also, in a gaming machine in which the special symbols stop after a plurality of cycle variations, the small symbols and the first sub-variation display are stopped and displayed at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation.

In addition, in a gaming machine in which special symbols stop after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the holding icon performs a periodic action (effect action, such as left-right shaking, rotation, etc.) during the execution of the cycle fluctuation and after the end of the cycle fluctuation. are doing.

Also, in a gaming machine in which special symbols stop after a plurality of cycles of variation, the disappearance effect (annihilation animation) of the icon is terminated at a timing different from the end timing of the last cycle variation. Specifically, after the last cycle variation ends, the effect of disappearing the icon is ended.

In addition, in a gaming machine where special symbols stop after multiple cycle fluctuations, the game sound that started to be output before the start of the last cycle fluctuation (effect BGM, stop sound in the look-ahead chance effect, and other temporary stop of the effect pattern (temporary stop sound output at time, final stop sound output at time of final stop) ends at a timing different from the end timing of the last cycle variation. Also, the audible output of the game sound (temporary stop sound, etc.) that started before the start of the last cycle variation ends before the last cycle variation ends.

Also, in a gaming machine in which special symbols stop after a plurality of cycles of variation, predetermined game sounds (effect BGM, etc.) are audibly output during execution of cycle variation and after completion of the final cycle variation.

Also, in a gaming machine in which special symbols stop after a plurality of cycles of variation, a background effect using a background image is executed during execution of cycle variation and after completion of the last cycle variation.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 can display a number image (first number reservation SHA, second number reservation SHB) indicating the number of reservations for the right to judge a big hit (variation of special symbols) and a reservation icon. At the start of fluctuation, after changing the display mode of the number image (for example, changing from "4" to "3"), it is possible to change the display mode of the pending icon (for example, changing from 4 to 3). . The display mode of the number image does not change when there is no new prize winning at the starting opening during the variation of the special symbols. On the other hand, the pending icon repeats a periodic operation of changing the display mode from the first state to the second state at a predetermined cycle even if there is no new prize winning at the starting port during the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is possible to Also, a plurality of pending icons can be displayed, and the plurality of pending icons are synchronized (or nearly synchronized) to perform periodic operations.

When the pending icon is additionally displayed, part of the display mode differs between when the additional display of the pending icon is started and when the additional display is completed. Further, a part of the operation mode of the periodic operation may be different between when the additional display of the pending icon is started and when the additional display is completed. For example, at the start of the additional display, the movement may be small, and after the additional display is completed, the movement may be large. For example, when the additional display is started, the operation may be performed with a horizontal tilt of 0 to 10 degrees, and after the additional display is completed, the horizontal tilt of the display may be within a range of 25 degrees.

In addition, the size of the area where the number image is displayed is the same when the number of reserved variations of the special symbol is single and when there are multiple, but the size of the area where the reserved icon is displayed is different. .

In addition, it is possible to display the suspended icon and the icon, and it is possible to cause the suspended icon and the icon to repeatedly perform a predetermined periodic operation during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is completed, the The icon may be extinguished (hidden), and then the periodic action of the pending icon may be ended. Note that the icon may disappear after the periodical action of the suspended icon is terminated.

In addition, it is possible to display the suspended icon and the icon, and it is possible to cause the suspended icon and the icon to repeatedly perform a predetermined periodic operation during the variation of the special symbols. After the production pattern is temporarily stopped, the icon may be extinguished, and the pending icon may be cyclically operated after the production pattern is actually stopped and before the next special pattern starts to fluctuate.

In addition, it is possible to display the effect pattern and the icon, it is possible to cause the icon to repeatedly perform a predetermined periodic operation during the fluctuation of the special pattern, and after the effect pattern is temporarily stopped, the periodic operation of the icon is terminated, the transparency of the icon is changed from the first transparency to the second transparency, and the icon disappears. Incidentally, the effect pattern is permanently stopped after being temporarily stopped, and the transparency does not change before and after the final stop.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and to repeatedly execute a predetermined periodic operation of changing the reserved icon from the first state to the second state while the special pattern is changed. After starting the variable display of the small symbols with the start of the variation of the special symbols, the suspended icon may be moved, and after the movement, the suspended icon may start the periodic operation from the first state (from the beginning).

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and to repeatedly execute a predetermined periodic operation of changing the reserved icon from the first state to the second state while the special pattern is changed. Along with the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, after the fluctuation display of the small symbols is started, the pending icon is moved, and the pending icon is moved between the actual stop of the production pattern and the start of the fluctuation of the next special symbol. may be caused to perform a periodic operation.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a small pattern, and a pending icon, and in the first production mode (first stage), a first periodic operation in which the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state is performed. It is possible to repeat, and in a second effect mode (second stage) different from the first effect mode, it is possible to repeat the second cycle operation in which the pending icon changes from the third state to the fourth state. Yes, after starting the variable display of the small symbols along with the start of the variation of the special symbols, the pending icon starts to move. The time required for the pending icon to change from the first state to the next first state in the first periodic operation (cycle of the first periodic operation) is the same as the period in which the pending icon changes from the third state to the next It may be the same as the time (the period of the second periodic operation) until the state 3 is reached.

In addition, it is possible to display a numeric image indicating the number of pending and a pending icon, and in the first production mode (first stage), the first periodic operation in which the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state is performed. It is possible to repeat, and in a second effect mode (second stage) different from the first effect mode, it is possible to repeat the second cycle operation in which the pending icon changes from the third state to the fourth state. be. After the display mode of the number image changes with the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the display mode of the pending icon changes. The time required for the pending icon to change from the first state to the next first state in the first periodic operation (cycle of the first periodic operation) is the same as the period in which the pending icon changes from the third state to the next It may be the same as the time (the period of the second periodic operation) until the state 3 is reached.

In addition, a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon can be displayed, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than the first display form at least from the first display form of the reserved icon. It is possible to change to the second display mode, and after starting the variable display of the small symbols with the start of the variation of the special symbols, it is possible to start the movement of the pending icon. It is possible to repeat a first cycle operation in which the hold icon displayed in the first display mode changes from the first state to the second state in the first cycle, and the hold displayed in the second display mode It may be possible to repeat the second periodic action in which the icon changes from the third state to the fourth state at a second periodicity different from the first periodicity.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a pending icon, and a pending number display (numeric image) indicating another pending number. It is possible to repeat in cycles. In addition, when the production pattern stops, it is possible to execute the production using the production pattern (pre-stop action production or effect adding effect), and when the production pattern stops, the periodic operation of the pending icon is terminated, After changing the display of the number of reservations according to the change of the next special symbol, the reservation icon is moved. The cycle of the periodic action of the pending icon is shorter than the effect time of the effect using the effect pattern. In addition, the cycle of the periodic action of the pending icon may be longer than the effect time of the effect using the effect symbol.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a pending icon, and a pending number display (numeric image) indicating another pending number. It is possible to repeat in cycles. In addition, when the production pattern is stopped, it is possible to execute the production using the production pattern (pre-stop operation production or the production of adding an effect). In addition, it is possible to cause the suspended icon to perform a cyclical action during the period from when the production pattern is completely stopped until the next fluctuation is started, and the period of the periodic action of the suspended icon is determined by using the production pattern. Shorter than the production time of the production. In addition, the cycle of the periodic action of the pending icon may be longer than the effect time of the effect using the effect symbol.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a small pattern, and a pending icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state, and a small pattern is executed as the special symbols start to fluctuate. After starting the variable display of symbols, it is possible to move the pending icon. After execution of the ready-to-win performance (N-ready-to-win performance), when the special performance (SP ready-to-win performance) in which the special game is highly expected to be executed is executed, the pending icon is hidden, and after the ready-to-win performance is executed, the special performance is executed. The display of the pending icon is maintained when the is not executed. The display of the small symbols is maintained regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect is executed.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a small pattern, and a pending icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state, and a small pattern is executed as the special symbols start to fluctuate. After starting the variable display of symbols, it is possible to move the pending icon. It is possible to change the display mode of the pending icon from at least the first display mode to a second display mode in which the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than in the first display mode, and the expectation that the special game will be executed. The suspended icon displayed in the second display mode is hidden when a special performance with a high degree is executed, and the suspended icon is displayed in the second display mode when the special game is performed after the special performance is finished. is not performed and the special game is not performed, a pending icon is displayed. The display of the small pattern is maintained even when the special performance is executed.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a small pattern, and a pending icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state, and a small pattern is executed as the special symbols start to fluctuate. After starting the variable display of symbols, it is possible to move the pending icon. In the case of performing a special game, when executing a special effect with a high expectation that the special game will be executed after the ready-to-win effect is executed, the pending icon is hidden (FIG. 57(o)), and the special game is executed. , and when the special effect is not executed after the ready-to-win effect is executed, the display of the pending icon is maintained (as a result of FIG. 56(j), a big win is announced). When the special game is performed, the display of the small pattern is maintained both when the special performance is executed after the ready-to-win performance is executed and when the special performance is not executed.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a small pattern, and a pending icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state, and a small pattern is executed as the special symbols start to fluctuate. After starting the variable display of symbols, it is possible to move the pending icon. When a special effect with a high degree of expectation for the execution of the special game is being executed, the pending icon is hidden (Fig. 57(o)), and after the special effect is finished, an effect pattern indicating a failure is displayed. When a performance symbol indicating a big hit is displayed, the pending icon is hidden (Fig. 60 (r-2)), and after the special performance is completed, a performance symbol indicating a loss is displayed, and then a performance symbol indicating a big win is displayed. is not displayed, a pending icon is displayed (FIG. 58(u)). The display of the small pattern is maintained even when the special performance is executed.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a small pattern, and a pending icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state, and a small pattern is executed as the special symbols start to fluctuate. After starting the variable display of symbols, it is possible to move the pending icon. After the ready-to-win effect is executed, the pending icon is hidden when the special effect with a high expectation of the special game being executed is being executed (Fig. 57(o)), and after the special effect is finished, the effect pattern indicating the failure. is displayed, the pending icon is displayed (FIG. 58(u)), and after execution of the reach effect, the display of the pending icon is maintained when the special effect is not executed. The display of the small pattern is maintained even when the special performance is executed.

In addition, it is possible to display a production pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and after the fluctuation display of the small pattern starts with the start of the fluctuation of the special pattern, the reserved icon starts to move, and the small pattern is a predetermined number. Display fluctuating period. The suspended icon can repeat the cyclic operation of changing from the first state to the second state at a cycle different from the predetermined cycle (the cycle of variable display of the small symbols).

In addition, it is possible to display the production pattern, the sub-first variation display indicating that the special pattern is being changed, and the pending icon, and by blinking the sub-first variation display at a predetermined cycle, the special symbol is displayed. is fluctuating. After the first sub-variation indicator starts blinking with the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the holding icon starts to move, and the holding icon changes from the first state to the second state. It is possible to repeat at a period different from the period (period of blinking of the first sub variable display).

In addition, it is possible to display a pending icon, and after the first special symbol display 60 is changed and displayed (lighted and extinguished) at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to notify the judgment result of the big hit judgment, and according to the result of the big hit judgment After the first special symbol display 60 starts the variable display, the pending icon starts to move, and the periodic operation in which the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state is performed in the predetermined cycle (first special The cycle of the variable display of the pattern display 60. For example, it is possible to repeat at a cycle different from the cycle of the cycle change.

In addition, it is possible to display a pending number display (first number pending SHA, sub-first pending display) that displays the pending number, and a pending icon, and the pending number display moves as the special symbols start to fluctuate. changes without change, and the pending icon moves after the pending number display changes.

Further, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and after the small pattern starts to be variably displayed as the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the reserved icon starts to move. The hold icon repeats a periodic motion of reciprocating between a first position and a second position. The moving direction of the small symbols is different from the moving direction of the pending icon in the periodic operation.

In addition, it is possible to display a pending icon, and after the first special symbol display device 60 is changed and displayed (lighting and blinking) at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to notify the determination result of the big hit determination, and the pending icon is in the first state. It is possible to repeat the periodic operation changing from to the second state at a period different from the predetermined period (the period of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol display 60. For example, the period of the cycle fluctuation). After the first special symbol display 60 starts lighting at the time of power restoration, a pending icon is displayed.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern and a pending icon, and after the performance pattern stops fluctuating as the special pattern stops fluctuating, the pending icon starts to move, and the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state. , and when executing a special performance with a high degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, the display mode of performance symbols is changed while the mode of the periodic motion is not changed.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern and a pending icon, and after the performance pattern stops fluctuating as the special pattern stops fluctuating, the pending icon starts to move, and the pending icon changes from the first state to the second state. can be executed, and when executing a special performance with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game, the display mode of the performance pattern is changed and the reserved icon is hidden.

As described above, during the cycle fluctuation of the special symbols, the start action effect using the effect pattern, the variable display effect using the effect pattern, the stop action effect using the effect pattern, the icon addition display effect, the icon movement display effect, Suspended icon or periodic action using the icon, disappearance effect of the icon, disappearance effect of the suspended icon, variable display effect using small symbols, and other various effects during fluctuation of special symbols. may be as follows: For example, the time of the action effect at the start using the effect pattern may be longer or shorter than the time of the action effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern, and these times are expected to perform the special game. It can be different depending on the degree. For example, when the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation of the special symbol is relatively low, the motion effect at the start of the variation may be longer (or shorter) than the motion effect at the stop, or may be the same. Further, when the degree of expectation is relatively high, the motion presentation at stop may be longer (or shorter) than the motion presentation at start, or may be the same. In addition, regardless of the degree of expectation, the time of the variable display effect using the effect pattern may be longer than the respective times of the start time action effect and the stop time action effect (and the sum of these times). Also, the duration of the action effect at the start may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of the moving display effect of the pending icon or the icon (icon). Also, the duration of the action effect at stop may be longer than or shorter than the duration of the icon movement display effect, or may be the same. Also, the duration of the start-time action presentation may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the periodic action of the icon. Also, the duration of the stop-time action presentation may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the periodic action of the icon. Also, the duration of the motion effect at stop may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of the disappearing effect of the icon. Also, the duration of the start action effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of the disappearing effect of the icon. In addition, the duration of the action effect at the start may be longer or shorter than the duration of the pending icon disappearance effect when the superfluous pending icon is erased when the command is not normally received, can be the same.

Also, the time of the variable display effect using the small symbols (or the first sub-variable display device) may be longer than the time of each of the start time motion effect and the stop time motion effect using the effect symbols. Also, the time of the variable display effect using the small symbols (or the first sub-variable display device) may be longer than the sum of the time of the action effect at the start and the time of the action effect at the stop. Also, the time of the variable display effect using the small symbols (or the sub-first variable display) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start operation effect and the time of the variable display effect using the effect symbols. Also, the time of the variable display effect using the small pattern (or the sub-first variable display) may be longer than the sum of the time of the variable display effect using the effect pattern and the time of the motion effect at stop.

In addition, when the production using the production accessories is performed during the fluctuation of the special pattern, the time from the start of the production accessories to the return to the initial position is longer than the time of the start operation production in the fluctuation It can be long. It should be noted that the time from when the performance accessory starts the action until it returns to the initial position may be shorter than or the same as the time of the motion presentation at the start. In addition, when the production using the production accessories is performed during the fluctuation of the special pattern, the time from when the production accessories start to return to the initial position is the stop operation using the production pattern in the fluctuation It may be longer, shorter, or the same as the production time. When the production using the production accessories is performed during the fluctuation of the special pattern, the time from the start of the production accessory to the return to the initial position is the time of the variable display production using the production pattern in that fluctuation. may be shorter than, longer than, or equal to. In addition, when the production using the production accessories is performed during the fluctuation of the special pattern, the time from when the production accessories start to return to the initial position is It may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the movement display effect of . Also, the time from when the performance accessory starts to move until it returns to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the periodic motion of the icon. Also, the time from when the effect accessory starts to move to when it returns to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time for the disappearance effect of the icon. In addition, the time from when the performance accessory starts to move to when it returns to the initial position is longer than the time for the disappearance of the pending icon when the extra pending icon disappears when the command is not received normally. It can be the same, shorter, or the same.

Further, when a button promotion effect is executed to prompt button operations as shown in FIGS. It may be longer than each time (and the sum of these times) of the action effect at the start and the action effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern. Also, the maximum time during which the valid period image YKG is displayed may be shorter than the time of the variable display effect using the effect symbol in that variation.

Further, when the button promotion effect is executed while the special symbols are changing, the maximum time during which the valid period image YKG is displayed may be longer than the time of the icon movement display effect. In addition, when the button promotion effect is executed while the special symbol is changing, the maximum time during which the valid period image YKG is displayed is the icon disappearance effect (the normal disappearance effect of the icon, and the Effect of disappearance of the extra icon when the extra icon is displayed).

Further, when the button promotion effect and the effect using the effect accessory are executed while the special symbols are changing, the maximum time during which the valid period image YKG is displayed is the initial position after the effect accessory starts to operate. It may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time to return to . In addition, when the effect production at the start is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special pattern, the execution time of the effect production at the start (the time during which the effect is added) is shorter than the operation production at the start using the production pattern in the fluctuation. It can be the same, longer, or the same. Also, the execution time of the effect presentation at the start may be shorter, longer, or the same as the respective times of the stop-time action presentation and the variable display presentation using the presentation pattern in the variation. Further, in the case where the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, the time during which the effect image showing the chance eye is displayed may be shorter or longer than the motion effect at stop using the effect symbol in the variation. and may be the same. In addition, when the look-ahead chance effect is executed, the time during which the effect image is displayed may be shorter, longer, or the same as the starting operation effect using the effect pattern in the variation. good. In addition, when the look-ahead chance effect is executed, the time during which the effect image is displayed may be shorter, longer, or the same as the variable display effect using the effect pattern in the variation. .

In addition, the time of the action performance at the start using the performance design is longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special design. Also, the time of the variable display performance using the performance symbols is longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special symbols. In addition, the time of stop operation production using the production design is longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special design.

Also, the time of the icon movement display effect may be longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special symbols. Also, the time for the icon addition display effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time for one cycle variation of the special symbols. In addition, the normal time for the disappearance effect of the icon may be longer, shorter, or the same as the one-cycle variation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the case where an extra icon is displayed due to a state in which commands cannot be received, the time for the icon disappearance effect when the extra icon disappears is the time of one cycle change of the special symbol. may be shorter than, longer than, or equal to. Also, the time of the icon disappearance presentation when the extra icons are erased may be longer than the time of one unit change in the cycle variation of the special symbols.

Also, the fluctuation cycle of the first sub-variation indicator 81 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol. In addition, the fluctuation cycle of the first sub-variation indicator 81 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol. good. In addition, the fluctuation cycle of the second sub-variation indicator 82 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle fluctuation of the second special symbol. In addition, the fluctuation period of the second sub-variation indicator 82 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the second special symbol. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine has been described in which, when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, a jackpot game is performed and the game state is changed via the jackpot game. In another embodiment, even when it is not determined to be a big hit, the game state may be shifted from the normal game state to the time-saving game state. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the normal game state (continuous number of times determined as losing in the jackpot determination) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 300 times), even if the variation is not determined to be a jackpot , a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, may be 100 times or more) may be shifted to the time-saving game state. In this case, if the special symbol does not come to a big hit before it fluctuates a predetermined number of times, the time-saving game state ends and returns to the normal game state. Alternatively, even if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (that is, even if the random number value for jackpot determination obtained at the time of winning to the starting gate is a value indicating a loss), the random number for determining the jackpot pattern obtained at the time of winning When the numerical value (random number for determining the jackpot pattern (type of jackpot) when it is determined to be a jackpot) is a predetermined value, it may be shifted to a time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times. Further, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, the predetermined upper limit number of times may be variable or fixed. For example, when the predetermined upper limit number of times is variable, when the time-saving gaming state is given when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes the first number, and when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes the second number In some cases, there may be times when the time-saving gaming state is provided. In this case, the number of times of time saving given may be varied according to the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and the number of times of time saving may be set more as the number of times of variation increases. In addition, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the random number for judging the jackpot symbol, the number of times of shortening time given may differ depending on the acquired random number for judging the jackpot symbol. For example, when the acquired random number for judging the jackpot design is the first value, the first number of time reductions is given, and when the acquired random number for judging the jackpot design is the second value, the second The number of working hours may be given. In addition, there may be a case of shifting to a time-saving game state based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols, or a case of shifting to a time-saving game state based on a random number value for judging a jackpot symbol. In this case, the number of times of reduced working hours to be imparted may be changed between the case of shifting to the reduced working hours game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols and the case of shifting to the reduced working hours game state based on the random number value for judging the jackpot symbols. For example, when shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, it is shifted to the time-saving gaming state of 50 times, and when shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the random number for judging the jackpot symbol, it You may be made to shift to the time-saving game state of 30 times less than. Conversely, the number of times of time saving may be increased in the case of shifting to the time saving game state based on the random number value for judging the jackpot pattern than in the case of shifting to the time saving game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols. In addition, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state without going through the big hit in this way, if the time-saving gaming state is given without going through the big hit during the time-saving gaming state that has been transferred, a new The time saving game state may continue for the number of time saving times given to. For example, when the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, You may be made to shift to the time-saving game state of 50 times. Alternatively, in this case, the number of working hours may be added. For example, when the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, 50 times newly given are added to the remaining 20 times, and the time saving game state of 70 times may be given. In addition, during the time-saving game state that does not go through such a big win, the time-saving game state that does not go through the big win may not be given. In addition, in the configuration of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols or the random number value for judging big-hit symbols without going through the big win, even if the time-saving suggesting effect suggesting the transition to the time-saving gaming state is performed. good. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the predetermined upper limit number of times, it may be configured that the time-saving suggesting effect is easily executed. Conversely, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is close to the predetermined upper limit number of times, it may be configured such that the time-saving suggestion effect is difficult to be performed. In addition, in the start operation production using the production pattern, a time saving suggestive production may be performed. For example, if the effect symbol operates in a specific mode at the start of fluctuation, it may suggest the possibility of shifting to a time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variable display effect using the effect pattern, the time saving suggestive effect may be performed. In addition, in the motion effect at the time of stop using the effect pattern, the time saving suggesting effect may be performed.

(Structure of game machine according to the present invention and its effect)
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. Note that parentheses indicate correspondence with the embodiment, and are merely examples.

(Configuration 1)
A gaming machine according to configuration 1 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means, in the variable display of the identification information, a first variable effect by a first effect symbol (a effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol It is possible to execute a second variation effect by the production pattern (small pattern 702), and the first variation production includes a start action production (floating, rotation, etc.) that causes the first production pattern to operate in a predetermined manner, and the After the start action effect, a variable display effect (scroll display) for variably displaying the first effect symbol is included, and the second change effect is executed during the start action effect.

(Configuration 2)
A gaming machine according to configuration 2 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means, in the variable display of the identification information, a first variable effect by a first effect symbol (a effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol It is possible to execute a second variation effect by the production pattern (small pattern 702), and the first variation production includes a start action production (floating, rotation, etc.) that causes the first production pattern to operate in a predetermined manner, and the After the start operation effect, including a variable display effect (scroll display) for variably displaying the first effect symbol, in the second variable effect, without operating the second effect symbol in a predetermined display mode, the The variable display of the second production pattern is executed.

(Composition 3)
A gaming machine according to configuration 3 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. , the effect control means can execute a variable effect by means of a performance symbol (a performance symbol 701) in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation effect ( floating, rotation, etc.), and a variable display effect (scroll display) that variably displays the effect pattern after the start action effect, and hold information corresponding to the hold memory (hold icon, number hold, sub-hold display device) can be displayed, and in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, the reserved information can be displayed in a reduced amount, and the reserved information is displayed in a reduced amount after the start action presentation. .

(Composition 4)
A gaming machine according to configuration 4 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. , the effect control means can execute a variable effect by means of a performance symbol (a performance symbol 701) in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation effect ( floating, rotating, etc.), and a variable display effect (scroll display) that variably displays the effect pattern after the start action effect, and a pending display (suspended icon) corresponding to the pending memory can be displayed, It is possible to move and display the pending display in accordance with the decrease of the pending memory, and the moving display of the pending display is started during the start action presentation.

(Composition 5)
A gaming machine according to configuration 5 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect includes a start action effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the start action effect. After that, it includes a variable display effect for variably displaying the effect pattern, a pending display corresponding to the pending memory can be displayed, and the pending display is moved and displayed according to the decrease in the pending memory. During the start action rendering, the moving display of the pending display is terminated.

(Composition 6)
A gaming machine according to configuration 6 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect includes a start action effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the start action effect. After that, including a variable display effect that variably displays the effect pattern, a first information display (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed, and in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, the It is possible to move the first information display and display it as the second information display (the icon), and the first information display is started to be displayed during the start action presentation.

(Composition 7)
A gaming machine according to configuration 7 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect includes a start action effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the start action effect. After that, including a variable display effect that variably displays the effect pattern, a first information display (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed, and in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, the The first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon), and the second information display can be displayed during the start action presentation.

(Composition 8)
A gaming machine according to configuration 8 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect includes a start action effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the start action effect. After that, a variable display effect for variably displaying the effect pattern is included, a pending display (holding icon) corresponding to the holding memory can be displayed, and during the start operation production, the holding display is a predetermined display It is possible to operate (periodic operation) in a manner.

(Composition 9)
A gaming machine according to configuration 9 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect includes a start action effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the start action effect. After that, including a variable display effect that variably displays the effect pattern, a first information display (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed, and in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, the The first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the corresponding icon), and the second information display is operated (periodic operation) in a predetermined display mode during the start operation rendering. Is possible.

(Configuration 10)
A gaming machine according to configuration 10 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the production control means can execute a variable production by production patterns in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable production causes the production patterns to operate in a predetermined manner. A background effect of moving at least a part of a background image can be executed, including a start action effect, and a variable display effect of variably displaying the effect pattern after the start action effect, and during the start action effect, The background effect can be executed.

(Composition 11)
A gaming machine according to configuration 11 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the production control means can execute a variable production by production patterns in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable production causes the production patterns to operate in a predetermined manner. Including a start action effect and a variable display effect of variably displaying the effect pattern after the start action effect, the background effect of moving at least a part of the background image can be executed, and the start action effect is started. The background effect can be executed from the front.

(Composition 12)
A gaming machine according to configuration 12 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the production control means can execute a variable production by production patterns in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable production causes the production patterns to operate in a predetermined manner. A start motion effect and a variable display effect for variably displaying the effect pattern after the start motion effect, wherein a predetermined sound (BGM, etc.) can be output during the variable display of the identification information, and the start motion During the performance, the output of the predetermined sound is started.

(Composition 13)
A gaming machine according to configuration 13 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the production control means can execute a variable production by production patterns in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable production causes the production patterns to operate in a predetermined manner. A start motion effect and a variable display effect for variably displaying the effect pattern after the start motion effect, wherein a predetermined sound (BGM, etc.) can be output during the variable display of the identification information, and the start motion The predetermined sound can be output when the performance is executed.

(Composition 14)
A gaming machine according to configuration 14 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the production control means can execute a variable production by production patterns in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable production causes the production patterns to operate in a predetermined manner. A start motion effect and a variable display effect for variably displaying the effect pattern after the start motion effect, wherein a predetermined sound (BGM, etc.) can be output during the variable display of the identification information, and the start motion The predetermined sound output before execution of the performance can be continuously output even during execution of the start action performance.

(Composition 15)
A gaming machine according to configuration 15 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means, in the variable display of the identification information, a first variable effect by a first effect symbol (a effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol It is possible to execute a second variable effect by the production pattern (small pattern 702), and in the stop display of the identification information, a first stop display by the first production pattern and a second stop display by the second production pattern. can be executed, after the first variable effect, a pre-stop action effect for operating the first effect symbol in a predetermined mode can be executed, and after the pre-stop action effect, the first stop display is performed It is executable, and the second variable effect is being executed during the pre-stop action effect.

(Composition 16)
A gaming machine according to configuration 16 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the production control means can execute a variable production with a plurality of production patterns (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) in the variable display of the identification information, and the identification information In the stop display, it is possible to execute the stop display by the plurality of production patterns, and after the variable production, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action production in which the production patterns are operated in a predetermined manner, and the pre-stop action production After that, it is possible to execute the stop display by the plurality of performance symbols, and while the first performance symbol (left symbol) of the plurality of performance symbols is performing the pre-stop action performance, the plurality of performances There are times when the second performance symbol (right symbol) of the symbols performs the pre-stop action performance, and when the second performance symbol performs the variable display.

(Composition 17)
A gaming machine according to configuration 17 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the stop display by the effect pattern in the stop display of the identification information After the variable effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect in which the effect pattern is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, the stop display by the effect pattern can be executed. There is, and the identification information is variably displayed during the pre-stop action presentation.

(Composition 18)
A gaming machine according to configuration 18 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information, and capable of executing a stop display based on the effect symbol in the stop display of the identification information, and performing the variable effect. After that, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, it is possible to execute the stop display by the effect symbol, and the second corresponding to the pending memory 1 information display (holding icon) can be displayed, and in accordance with the reduction of the holding memory, the first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon). Yes, after the pre-stop action effect, a disappearing effect (disappearing effect of the icon) of extinguishing the second information display can be executed.

(Composition 19)
A gaming machine according to configuration 19 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information, and capable of executing a stop display based on the effect symbol in the stop display of the identification information, and performing the variable effect. After that, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, it is possible to execute the stop display by the effect symbol, and the second corresponding to the pending memory 1 information display (holding icon) can be displayed, and in accordance with the reduction of the holding memory, the first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon). There is, and after the stop display by the production pattern, the second information display disappears.

(Configuration 20)
A gaming machine according to configuration 20 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. , The effect control means, in the variable display of the identification information, the first variable effect by the first effect pattern (production pattern 701), the second effect by the second effect pattern (small pattern 702) different from the first effect pattern It is possible to execute 2 variable effects, and in the stop display of the identification information, it is possible to execute a first stop display by the first production pattern and a second stop display by the second production pattern, and the first After the variable effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect in which the first effect pattern is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, it is possible to execute the first stop display, and in the reserved memory A corresponding first information display (holding icon) can be displayed, and in response to the reduction of the holding memory, the first information display is moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon). is possible, and after the second stop display is executed, a disappearing effect for disappearing the second information display can be executed.

(Composition 21)
A gaming machine according to configuration 21 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means, in the variable display of the identification information, a first variable effect by a first effect symbol (a effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol It is possible to execute a second variable effect by the production pattern (small pattern 702), and in the stop display of the identification information, a first stop display by the first production pattern and a second stop display by the second production pattern. can be executed, after the first variable effect, a pre-stop action effect for operating the first effect symbol in a predetermined mode can be executed, and after the pre-stop action effect, the first stop display is performed It is possible to execute the second stop display without operating the second effect symbol in a predetermined display mode after the second variable effect.

(Composition 22)
A gaming machine according to configuration 22 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the stop display by the effect pattern in the stop display of the identification information After the variable effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect in which the effect pattern is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, the stop display by the effect pattern can be executed. A background effect can be executed by moving at least a part of the background image, and the background effect can be executed during the execution of the stop display by the effect symbol.

(Composition 23)
A gaming machine according to configuration 23 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the stop display by the effect pattern in the stop display of the identification information After the variable effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect in which the effect pattern is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, the stop display by the effect pattern can be executed. A background effect for moving at least a part of the background image can be executed, and the background effect can be executed during the execution of the pre-stop action effect and the stop display by the effect symbol.

(Composition 24)
A gaming machine according to configuration 24 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the stop display by the effect pattern in the stop display of the identification information After the variable effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect in which the effect pattern is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, the stop display by the effect pattern can be executed. A predetermined sound (BGM, etc.) can be output during the variable display of the identification information, and the predetermined sound is continuously output during the execution of the pre-stop action effect and the stop display based on the effect symbol. It is possible.

(Composition 25)
A gaming machine according to configuration 25 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the stop display by the effect pattern in the stop display of the identification information After the variable effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect in which the effect pattern is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, the stop display by the effect pattern can be executed. A predetermined sound (BGM, etc.) can be output during the variable display of the identification information, and the predetermined sound can be output in response to the operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19) during the pre-stop action presentation. Volume is adjustable.

(Composition 26)
A gaming machine according to configuration 26 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the stop display by the effect pattern in the stop display of the identification information After the variable effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop action effect in which the effect pattern is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop action effect, the stop display by the effect pattern can be executed. A predetermined sound (BGM, etc.) can be output during the variable display of the identification information, and the predetermined sound can be output in response to the operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19) during the pre-stop action presentation. A volume can be adjusted, a predetermined notification sound can be output when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined notification sound (error notification sound) is output during the pre-stop operation presentation, the predetermined It is possible to suppress the volume of the sound of

(Composition 27)
A gaming machine according to configuration 27 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means, in the variable display of the identification information, the first variable effect by the first effect pattern (effect pattern 701), the second effect different from the first effect pattern It is possible to execute a second variation performance by a pattern (small pattern 702), and the first variation performance is to operate the first performance pattern in one of a plurality of modes (floating, rotation, etc.). It includes a start action effect and a variable display effect of variably displaying the first effect symbol after the start action effect, and the second change effect is executed during the start action effect.

(Composition 28)
A gaming machine according to configuration 28 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means, in the variable display of the identification information, a first variable effect by a first effect symbol (a effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol It is possible to execute a second variable effect by the effect pattern (small pattern 702), and the first variable effect is to operate the first effect pattern in one of a plurality of modes (floating, rotating, etc.). and a variable display effect of variably displaying the first performance pattern after the start motion performance, and in the second variable performance, the second performance pattern is operated in a predetermined display mode. Instead, the variable display of the second effect symbol is executed.

(Composition 29)
A gaming machine according to configuration 29 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation of operating the effect pattern in one of a plurality of modes. production, and a variable display production for variably displaying the production pattern after the start action production, and the holding information (holding icon, number holding, sub-holding display, etc.) corresponding to the holding storage can be displayed. , it is possible to reduce the amount of the reserved information displayed in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, and the reduced amount of the reserved information is displayed after the start action presentation.

(Configuration 30)
A gaming machine according to configuration 30 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation of operating the effect pattern in one of a plurality of modes. A production and a variable display production for variably displaying the production pattern after the start action production, a holding display (holding icon) corresponding to the holding memory can be displayed, and the holding memory is reduced. In response, the pending display can be moved and displayed, and the moving display of the pending display is started during the start action presentation.

(Composition 31)
A gaming machine according to configuration 31 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation of operating the effect pattern in one of a plurality of modes. A production and a variable display production for variably displaying the production pattern after the start action production, a holding display (holding icon) corresponding to the holding memory can be displayed, and the holding memory is reduced. , the suspended display can be moved and displayed, and the moving display of the suspended display is terminated during the start action presentation.

(Composition 32)
A gaming machine according to configuration 32 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation of operating the effect pattern in one of a plurality of modes. A production and a variable display production for variably displaying the production pattern after the start operation production, a first information display (holding icon) corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed, and the reserved memory is reduced. The first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the corresponding icon) according to the event, and the first information display can be moved and displayed during the start action presentation. has started.

(Composition 33)
A gaming machine according to configuration 33 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation of operating the effect pattern in one of a plurality of modes. A production and a variable display production for variably displaying the production pattern after the start operation production, a first information display (holding icon) corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed, and the reserved memory is reduced. The first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the corresponding icon) according to the event, and the second information display can be displayed during the start motion presentation. is possible.

(Composition 34)
A gaming machine according to configuration 34 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation of operating the effect pattern in one of a plurality of modes. production, and a variable display production for variably displaying the production pattern after the start action production, a holding display (holding icon) corresponding to the holding memory can be displayed, and during the start action production, It is possible to operate (cycle) the hold display in a predetermined display mode.

(Composition 35)
A gaming machine according to configuration 35 is a gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means , obtaining determination information, determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information, and displaying the identification information variably based on the result of the determination, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information can be stopped and displayed, and the judgment information before the judgment is made can be stored in the holding storage means as holding storage, and the holding storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect based on the effect pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable effect is a start operation of operating the effect pattern in one of a plurality of modes. A production and a variable display production for variably displaying the production pattern after the start operation production, a first information display (holding icon) corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed, and the reserved memory is reduced. The first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the corresponding icon) according to the event, and the second information display can be displayed in a predetermined display mode during the start action rendering. It is possible to operate (periodic operation) at .

The configurations according to the embodiments described so far, other embodiments, and modifications thereof can be arbitrarily combined as long as they do not contradict each other. Moreover, the present invention is not limited to the configurations according to the above-described embodiment, other embodiments, and modifications thereof, and other modifications may be added.

1 pachinko machine 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 first big winning port 56 second big winning port 60 first special symbol display device 61 second special symbol display device 62 normal symbol display device 63 first special symbol Suspension indicator 64 Second special symbol suspension display 81 Sub-first fluctuation display 82 Sub-second variation display 83 Sub-first suspension display 84 Sub-second suspension display 701 Production pattern 702 Small symbol HA 1st suspension icon HB 2nd reserved icon TI Applicable icon SHA 1st digit reserved SHB 2nd digit reserved

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A game machine comprising an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means,
The main control means is
Get judgment information,
Based on the determination information, determine whether to execute a special game,
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to stop display the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information is variably displayed,
The production control means is
In the variable display of the identification information, when a predetermined command is received as the command, it is possible to execute a variable effect according to the effect pattern,
During the variable production, it is possible to execute a preliminary production that suggests in advance the possibility that a special game will be executed,
The preliminary performance includes a first preliminary performance and a second preliminary performance different from the first preliminary performance,
In the stop display of the identification information, the stop display by the production pattern can be executed,
In the variable effect, a start action effect for operating the effect symbols in a predetermined mode can be executed, after the start action effect, a variable display effect for variably displaying the effect symbols can be executed, and the variable display is possible . After the production, it is possible to execute a pre-stop operation production that operates the production pattern in a predetermined manner,
If the predetermined command is not received when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, it is possible not to execute the start action effect and the first preliminary effect, but the second preliminary effect is executed. is possible and
When a predetermined condition is established, after the pre-stop motion effect, the variable effect can be terminated by executing the stop display with the effect symbol when the predetermined time elapses,
capable of executing a background rendering that moves at least part of the background image;
The background effect can be executed during the execution of the pre-stop action effect and the stop display by the effect pattern,
When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the background effect can be executed without executing the stop display by the effect pattern when the predetermined time elapses after the pre-stop action effect , and the variation. A game machine capable of executing the start action effect corresponding to the next predetermined command when receiving the next predetermined command during execution of the effect.

Images